| 
     1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.  | 
         | 
     2 %  | 
         | 
     3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.  | 
         | 
     4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi  | 
         | 
     5 %  | 
         | 
     6 \def\texinfoversion{2003-07-28.08} | 
         | 
     7 %  | 
         | 
     8 % Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,  | 
         | 
     9 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.  | 
         | 
    10 %  | 
         | 
    11 % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or  | 
         | 
    12 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as  | 
         | 
    13 % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at  | 
         | 
    14 % your option) any later version.  | 
         | 
    15 %  | 
         | 
    16 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be  | 
         | 
    17 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty  | 
         | 
    18 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU  | 
         | 
    19 % General Public License for more details.  | 
         | 
    20 %  | 
         | 
    21 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License  | 
         | 
    22 % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write  | 
         | 
    23 % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,  | 
         | 
    24 % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.  | 
         | 
    25 %  | 
         | 
    26 % In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.  | 
         | 
    27 % You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve  | 
         | 
    28 % what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!  | 
         | 
    29 %  | 
         | 
    30 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug  | 
         | 
    31 % reports; you can get the latest version from:  | 
         | 
    32 %   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/texinfo.tex  | 
         | 
    33 %     (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)  | 
         | 
    34 %   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex  | 
         | 
    35 %     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),  | 
         | 
    36 %   and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.  | 
         | 
    37 %  | 
         | 
    38 % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.  | 
         | 
    39 %  | 
         | 
    40 % The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out  | 
         | 
    41 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.  | 
         | 
    42 %  | 
         | 
    43 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a  | 
         | 
    44 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the  | 
         | 
    45 % problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.  | 
         | 
    46 %  | 
         | 
    47 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the  | 
         | 
    48 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple  | 
         | 
    49 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:  | 
         | 
    50 %   tex foo.texi  | 
         | 
    51 %   texindex foo.??  | 
         | 
    52 %   tex foo.texi  | 
         | 
    53 %   tex foo.texi  | 
         | 
    54 %   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.  | 
         | 
    55 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.  | 
         | 
    56 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more  | 
         | 
    57 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.  | 
         | 
    58 %  | 
         | 
    59 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some  | 
         | 
    60 % extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the  | 
         | 
    61 % full Texinfo distribution.  | 
         | 
    62   | 
         | 
    63 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} | 
         | 
    64   | 
         | 
    65 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number  | 
         | 
    66 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because  | 
         | 
    67 % they might have appeared in the input file name.  | 
         | 
    68 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% | 
         | 
    69   \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}  | 
         | 
    70   | 
         | 
    71 \message{Basics,} | 
         | 
    72 \chardef\other=12  | 
         | 
    73   | 
         | 
    74 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.  | 
         | 
    75 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.  | 
         | 
    76 \let\+ = \relax  | 
         | 
    77   | 
         | 
    78 % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.  | 
         | 
    79 \let\ptexb=\b  | 
         | 
    80 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet  | 
         | 
    81 \let\ptexc=\c  | 
         | 
    82 \let\ptexcomma=\,  | 
         | 
    83 \let\ptexdot=\.  | 
         | 
    84 \let\ptexdots=\dots  | 
         | 
    85 \let\ptexend=\end  | 
         | 
    86 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv  | 
         | 
    87 \let\ptexexclam=\!  | 
         | 
    88 \let\ptexgtr=>  | 
         | 
    89 \let\ptexhat=^  | 
         | 
    90 \let\ptexi=\i  | 
         | 
    91 \let\ptexindent=\indent  | 
         | 
    92 \let\ptexlbrace=\{ | 
         | 
    93 \let\ptexless=<  | 
         | 
    94 \let\ptexplus=+  | 
         | 
    95 \let\ptexrbrace=\}  | 
         | 
    96 \let\ptexslash=\/  | 
         | 
    97 \let\ptexstar=\*  | 
         | 
    98 \let\ptext=\t  | 
         | 
    99   | 
         | 
   100 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it  | 
         | 
   101 % starts a new line in the output.  | 
         | 
   102 \newlinechar = `^^J  | 
         | 
   103   | 
         | 
   104 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.  | 
         | 
   105 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi | 
         | 
   106 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi | 
         | 
   107 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi | 
         | 
   108 \ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi | 
         | 
   109 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi | 
         | 
   110 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi | 
         | 
   111 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi | 
         | 
   112 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi | 
         | 
   113 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi | 
         | 
   114 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi | 
         | 
   115 \ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi | 
         | 
   116 \ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi | 
         | 
   117 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi | 
         | 
   118 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi | 
         | 
   119 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi | 
         | 
   120 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi | 
         | 
   121 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi | 
         | 
   122 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi | 
         | 
   123 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi | 
         | 
   124 %  | 
         | 
   125 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi | 
         | 
   126 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi | 
         | 
   127 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi | 
         | 
   128 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi | 
         | 
   129 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi | 
         | 
   130 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi | 
         | 
   131 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi | 
         | 
   132 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi | 
         | 
   133 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi | 
         | 
   134 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi | 
         | 
   135 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi | 
         | 
   136 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi | 
         | 
   137 %  | 
         | 
   138 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi | 
         | 
   139 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi | 
         | 
   140 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi | 
         | 
   141 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi | 
         | 
   142 \ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi | 
         | 
   143 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi | 
         | 
   144 \ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi | 
         | 
   145   | 
         | 
   146 % In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is  | 
         | 
   147 % in some cases the escape char.  | 
         | 
   148 \chardef\colonChar = `\:  | 
         | 
   149 \chardef\commaChar = `\,  | 
         | 
   150 \chardef\dotChar   = `\.  | 
         | 
   151 \chardef\equalChar = `\=  | 
         | 
   152 \chardef\exclamChar= `\!  | 
         | 
   153 \chardef\questChar = `\?  | 
         | 
   154 \chardef\semiChar  = `\;  | 
         | 
   155 \chardef\spaceChar = `\ %  | 
         | 
   156 \chardef\underChar = `\_  | 
         | 
   157   | 
         | 
   158 % Ignore a token.  | 
         | 
   159 %  | 
         | 
   160 \def\gobble#1{} | 
         | 
   161   | 
         | 
   162 % True if #1 is the empty string, i.e., called like `\ifempty{}'. | 
         | 
   163 %  | 
         | 
   164 \def\ifempty#1{\ifemptyx #1\emptymarkA\emptymarkB}% | 
         | 
   165 \def\ifemptyx#1#2\emptymarkB{\ifx #1\emptymarkA}% | 
         | 
   166   | 
         | 
   167 % Hyphenation fixes.  | 
         | 
   168 \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix} | 
         | 
   169 \hyphenation{eshell} | 
         | 
   170 \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers} | 
         | 
   171 \hyphenation{time-stamp} | 
         | 
   172 \hyphenation{white-space} | 
         | 
   173   | 
         | 
   174 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.  | 
         | 
   175 \newdimen\bindingoffset  | 
         | 
   176 \newdimen\normaloffset  | 
         | 
   177 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight  | 
         | 
   178   | 
         | 
   179 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file  | 
         | 
   180 % and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,  | 
         | 
   181 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make  | 
         | 
   182 % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log  | 
         | 
   183 % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.  | 
         | 
   184 %  | 
         | 
   185 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% | 
         | 
   186 \def\loggingall{% | 
         | 
   187   \tracingstats2  | 
         | 
   188   \tracingpages1  | 
         | 
   189   \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex  | 
         | 
   190   \tracingparagraphs1  | 
         | 
   191   \tracingoutput1  | 
         | 
   192   \tracingmacros2  | 
         | 
   193   \tracingrestores1  | 
         | 
   194   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen  | 
         | 
   195   \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging  | 
         | 
   196     \tracingscantokens1  | 
         | 
   197     \tracingifs1  | 
         | 
   198     \tracinggroups1  | 
         | 
   199     \tracingnesting2  | 
         | 
   200     \tracingassigns1  | 
         | 
   201   \fi  | 
         | 
   202   \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex  | 
         | 
   203   \errorcontextlines\maxdimen  | 
         | 
   204 }%  | 
         | 
   205   | 
         | 
   206 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing  | 
         | 
   207 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.  | 
         | 
   208 %  | 
         | 
   209 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount | 
         | 
   210   \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}  | 
         | 
   211 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount | 
         | 
   212   \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}  | 
         | 
   213 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount | 
         | 
   214   \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}  | 
         | 
   215   | 
         | 
   216 % For @cropmarks command.  | 
         | 
   217 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.  | 
         | 
   218 %  | 
         | 
   219 \newif\ifcropmarks  | 
         | 
   220 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue  | 
         | 
   221 %  | 
         | 
   222 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.  | 
         | 
   223 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986  | 
         | 
   224 %  | 
         | 
   225 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines  | 
         | 
   226 \newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc  | 
         | 
   227 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt  | 
         | 
   228 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in  | 
         | 
   229   | 
         | 
   230 % Main output routine.  | 
         | 
   231 \chardef\PAGE = 255  | 
         | 
   232 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} | 
         | 
   233   | 
         | 
   234 \newbox\headlinebox  | 
         | 
   235 \newbox\footlinebox  | 
         | 
   236   | 
         | 
   237 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents  | 
         | 
   238 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.  | 
         | 
   239 \def\onepageout#1{% | 
         | 
   240   \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi  | 
         | 
   241   %  | 
         | 
   242   \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset  | 
         | 
   243   \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi  | 
         | 
   244   %  | 
         | 
   245   % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in  | 
         | 
   246   % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).  | 
         | 
   247   \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% | 
         | 
   248   \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% | 
         | 
   249   %  | 
         | 
   250   {% | 
         | 
   251     % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to  | 
         | 
   252     % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends  | 
         | 
   253     % before the \shipout runs.  | 
         | 
   254     %  | 
         | 
   255     \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.  | 
         | 
   256     \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.  | 
         | 
   257     \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if  | 
         | 
   258                    % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.  | 
         | 
   259     \shipout\vbox{% | 
         | 
   260       % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.  | 
         | 
   261       \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi | 
         | 
   262       %  | 
         | 
   263       \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup  | 
         | 
   264         \hsize = \outerhsize  | 
         | 
   265         \vskip-\topandbottommargin  | 
         | 
   266         \vtop to0pt{% | 
         | 
   267           \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% | 
         | 
   268           \nointerlineskip  | 
         | 
   269           \line{% | 
         | 
   270             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% | 
         | 
   271             \hfill  | 
         | 
   272             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% | 
         | 
   273           }%  | 
         | 
   274           \vss}%  | 
         | 
   275         \vskip\topandbottommargin  | 
         | 
   276         \line\bgroup  | 
         | 
   277           \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.  | 
         | 
   278           \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi  | 
         | 
   279           \vbox\bgroup  | 
         | 
   280       \fi  | 
         | 
   281       %  | 
         | 
   282       \unvbox\headlinebox  | 
         | 
   283       \pagebody{#1}% | 
         | 
   284       \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt  | 
         | 
   285         % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.  | 
         | 
   286         % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)  | 
         | 
   287         % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.  | 
         | 
   288         \vskip 2\baselineskip  | 
         | 
   289         \unvbox\footlinebox  | 
         | 
   290       \fi  | 
         | 
   291       %  | 
         | 
   292       \ifcropmarks  | 
         | 
   293           \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup  | 
         | 
   294         \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup  | 
         | 
   295         \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill  | 
         | 
   296         \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick  | 
         | 
   297         \vbox to0pt{\vss | 
         | 
   298           \line{% | 
         | 
   299             \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% | 
         | 
   300             \hfill  | 
         | 
   301             \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% | 
         | 
   302           }%  | 
         | 
   303           \nointerlineskip  | 
         | 
   304           \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% | 
         | 
   305         }%  | 
         | 
   306       \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause  | 
         | 
   307       \fi  | 
         | 
   308     }% end of \shipout\vbox  | 
         | 
   309   }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive  | 
         | 
   310   \advancepageno  | 
         | 
   311   \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi  | 
         | 
   312 }  | 
         | 
   313   | 
         | 
   314 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen  | 
         | 
   315   | 
         | 
   316 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} | 
         | 
   317 {\catcode`\@ =11 | 
         | 
   318 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi | 
         | 
   319 % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)  | 
         | 
   320 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present  | 
         | 
   321   \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi | 
         | 
   322 \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1  | 
         | 
   323 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi  | 
         | 
   324 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}  | 
         | 
   325 }  | 
         | 
   326   | 
         | 
   327 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are  | 
         | 
   328 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize  | 
         | 
   329 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)  | 
         | 
   330 %  | 
         | 
   331 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} | 
         | 
   332 \def\nstop{\vbox | 
         | 
   333   {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} | 
         | 
   334 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} | 
         | 
   335 \def\nsbot{\vbox | 
         | 
   336   {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} | 
         | 
   337   | 
         | 
   338 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of  | 
         | 
   339 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a  | 
         | 
   340 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.  | 
         | 
   341 %  | 
         | 
   342 \def\parsearg#1{% | 
         | 
   343   \let\next = #1%  | 
         | 
   344   \begingroup  | 
         | 
   345     \obeylines  | 
         | 
   346     \futurelet\temp\parseargx  | 
         | 
   347 }  | 
         | 
   348   | 
         | 
   349 % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or  | 
         | 
   350 % the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.  | 
         | 
   351 \def\parseargx{% | 
         | 
   352   % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.  | 
         | 
   353   \ifx\obeyedspace\temp  | 
         | 
   354     \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace  | 
         | 
   355   \else  | 
         | 
   356     \expandafter\parseargline  | 
         | 
   357   \fi  | 
         | 
   358 }  | 
         | 
   359   | 
         | 
   360 % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).  | 
         | 
   361 {\obeyspaces % | 
         | 
   362  \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}} | 
         | 
   363   | 
         | 
   364 {\obeylines % | 
         | 
   365   \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% | 
         | 
   366     \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.  | 
         | 
   367     %  | 
         | 
   368     % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.  | 
         | 
   369     % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.  | 
         | 
   370     \argremovec #1\c\relax %  | 
         | 
   371     \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %  | 
         | 
   372     %  | 
         | 
   373     % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.  | 
         | 
   374     \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}% | 
         | 
   375   }%  | 
         | 
   376 }  | 
         | 
   377   | 
         | 
   378 % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX | 
         | 
   379 % do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call  | 
         | 
   380 % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is  | 
         | 
   381 % just to delimit the argument to the \c.  | 
         | 
   382 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} | 
         | 
   383 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} | 
         | 
   384   | 
         | 
   385 % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g., | 
         | 
   386 %    @end itemize  @c foo  | 
         | 
   387 % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the  | 
         | 
   388 % `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the  | 
         | 
   389 % result to \toks0.  | 
         | 
   390 %  | 
         | 
   391 % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces  | 
         | 
   392 % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.  | 
         | 
   393 % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever  | 
         | 
   394 % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed  | 
         | 
   395 % here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of  | 
         | 
   396 % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument | 
         | 
   397 % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.  | 
         | 
   398 %  | 
         | 
   399 \def\removeactivespaces#1{% | 
         | 
   400   \begingroup  | 
         | 
   401     \ignoreactivespaces  | 
         | 
   402     \edef\temp{#1}% | 
         | 
   403     \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}% | 
         | 
   404   \endgroup  | 
         | 
   405 }  | 
         | 
   406   | 
         | 
   407 % Change the active space to expand to nothing.  | 
         | 
   408 %  | 
         | 
   409 \begingroup  | 
         | 
   410   \obeyspaces  | 
         | 
   411   \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty} | 
         | 
   412 \endgroup  | 
         | 
   413   | 
         | 
   414   | 
         | 
   415 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} | 
         | 
   416   | 
         | 
   417 %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away  | 
         | 
   418 %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)  | 
         | 
   419 \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi} | 
         | 
   420 \def\ENVcheck{% | 
         | 
   421 \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue} | 
         | 
   422 \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage  | 
         | 
   423   | 
         | 
   424 % @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.  | 
         | 
   425 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} | 
         | 
   426   | 
         | 
   427 \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx} | 
         | 
   428   | 
         | 
   429 \def\beginxxx #1{% | 
         | 
   430 \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax  | 
         | 
   431 {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else | 
         | 
   432 \csname #1\endcsname\fi}  | 
         | 
   433   | 
         | 
   434 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.  | 
         | 
   435 %  | 
         | 
   436 \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx} | 
         | 
   437 \def\endxxx #1{% | 
         | 
   438   \removeactivespaces{#1}% | 
         | 
   439   \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}% | 
         | 
   440   %  | 
         | 
   441   \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax  | 
         | 
   442     \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax  | 
         | 
   443       % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.  | 
         | 
   444       \errhelp = \EMsimple  | 
         | 
   445       \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}% | 
         | 
   446     \else  | 
         | 
   447       \unmatchedenderror\endthing  | 
         | 
   448     \fi  | 
         | 
   449   \else  | 
         | 
   450     % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.  | 
         | 
   451     \csname E\endthing\endcsname  | 
         | 
   452   \fi  | 
         | 
   453 }  | 
         | 
   454   | 
         | 
   455 % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.  | 
         | 
   456 %  | 
         | 
   457 \def\unmatchedenderror#1{% | 
         | 
   458   \errhelp = \EMsimple  | 
         | 
   459   \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}% | 
         | 
   460 }  | 
         | 
   461   | 
         | 
   462 % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.  | 
         | 
   463 %  | 
         | 
   464 \def\defineunmatchedend#1{% | 
         | 
   465   \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}% | 
         | 
   466 }  | 
         | 
   467   | 
         | 
   468   | 
         | 
   469 %% Simple single-character @ commands  | 
         | 
   470   | 
         | 
   471 % @@ prints an @  | 
         | 
   472 % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).  | 
         | 
   473 \def\@{{\tt\char64}} | 
         | 
   474   | 
         | 
   475 % This is turned off because it was never documented  | 
         | 
   476 % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. | 
         | 
   477 %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '  | 
         | 
   478 %% but suppressing ligatures.  | 
         | 
   479 %\def\`{{`}} | 
         | 
   480 %\def\'{{'}} | 
         | 
   481   | 
         | 
   482 % Used to generate quoted braces.  | 
         | 
   483 \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} | 
         | 
   484 \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} | 
         | 
   485 \let\{=\mylbrace | 
         | 
   486 \let\}=\myrbrace  | 
         | 
   487 \begingroup  | 
         | 
   488   % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, | 
         | 
   489   % and @{ and @} for the aux file. | 
         | 
   490   \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other | 
         | 
   491   \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2  | 
         | 
   492   \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other  | 
         | 
   493   !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% | 
         | 
   494   !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%  | 
         | 
   495   !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% | 
         | 
   496   !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%  | 
         | 
   497 !endgroup  | 
         | 
   498   | 
         | 
   499 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent  | 
         | 
   500 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.  | 
         | 
   501 \let\, = \c  | 
         | 
   502 \let\dotaccent = \.  | 
         | 
   503 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} | 
         | 
   504 \let\tieaccent = \t  | 
         | 
   505 \let\ubaraccent = \b  | 
         | 
   506 \let\udotaccent = \d  | 
         | 
   507   | 
         | 
   508 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown  | 
         | 
   509 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.  | 
         | 
   510 \def\questiondown{?`} | 
         | 
   511 \def\exclamdown{!`} | 
         | 
   512   | 
         | 
   513 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.  | 
         | 
   514 \def\imacro{i} | 
         | 
   515 \def\jmacro{j} | 
         | 
   516 \def\dotless#1{% | 
         | 
   517   \def\temp{#1}% | 
         | 
   518   \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi  | 
         | 
   519   \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j  | 
         | 
   520   \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% | 
         | 
   521   \fi\fi  | 
         | 
   522 }  | 
         | 
   523   | 
         | 
   524 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space  | 
         | 
   525 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space  | 
         | 
   526 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and  | 
         | 
   527 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the  | 
         | 
   528 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.  | 
         | 
   529 {\catcode`@ = 11 | 
         | 
   530  % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble  | 
         | 
   531  % if the definition is written into an index file.  | 
         | 
   532  \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M  | 
         | 
   533  \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } | 
         | 
   534 }  | 
         | 
   535   | 
         | 
   536 % @: forces normal size whitespace following.  | 
         | 
   537 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } | 
         | 
   538   | 
         | 
   539 % @* forces a line break.  | 
         | 
   540 \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} | 
         | 
   541   | 
         | 
   542 % @/ allows a line break.  | 
         | 
   543 \let\/=\allowbreak  | 
         | 
   544   | 
         | 
   545 % @. is an end-of-sentence period.  | 
         | 
   546 \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } | 
         | 
   547   | 
         | 
   548 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.  | 
         | 
   549 \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } | 
         | 
   550   | 
         | 
   551 % @? is an end-of-sentence query.  | 
         | 
   552 \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } | 
         | 
   553   | 
         | 
   554 % @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the  | 
         | 
   555 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would  | 
         | 
   556 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.  | 
         | 
   557 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} | 
         | 
   558   | 
         | 
   559 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing  | 
         | 
   560 % it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box  | 
         | 
   561 % to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for  | 
         | 
   562 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is  | 
         | 
   563 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,  | 
         | 
   564 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and  | 
         | 
   565 % the text is small, which looks bad.  | 
         | 
   566 %  | 
         | 
   567 % Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can  | 
         | 
   568 % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it  | 
         | 
   569 % does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an  | 
         | 
   570 % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The  | 
         | 
   571 % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit  | 
         | 
   572 % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).  | 
         | 
   573 %  | 
         | 
   574 \newbox\groupbox  | 
         | 
   575 \def\vfilllimit{0.7} | 
         | 
   576 %  | 
         | 
   577 \def\group{\begingroup | 
         | 
   578   \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else  | 
         | 
   579     \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp  | 
         | 
   580     \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% | 
         | 
   581   \fi  | 
         | 
   582   %  | 
         | 
   583   % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large  | 
         | 
   584   % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the  | 
         | 
   585   % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of  | 
         | 
   586   % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space  | 
         | 
   587   % above.  But it's pretty close.  | 
         | 
   588   \def\Egroup{% | 
         | 
   589     \egroup           % End the \vtop.  | 
         | 
   590     % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.  | 
         | 
   591     \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox  | 
         | 
   592     % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).  | 
         | 
   593     \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal  | 
         | 
   594     % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big  | 
         | 
   595     % group, force a page break.  | 
         | 
   596     \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2  | 
         | 
   597       \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight  | 
         | 
   598         \page  | 
         | 
   599       \fi  | 
         | 
   600     \fi  | 
         | 
   601     \copy\groupbox  | 
         | 
   602     \endgroup         % End the \group.  | 
         | 
   603   }%  | 
         | 
   604   %  | 
         | 
   605   \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup  | 
         | 
   606     % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in  | 
         | 
   607     % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.  | 
         | 
   608     % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group  | 
         | 
   609     % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the  | 
         | 
   610     % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.  | 
         | 
   611     % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.  | 
         | 
   612     \everypar = {\strut}% | 
         | 
   613     %  | 
         | 
   614     % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's  | 
         | 
   615     % normal interline spacing.  | 
         | 
   616     \offinterlineskip  | 
         | 
   617     %  | 
         | 
   618     % OK, but now we have to do something about blank  | 
         | 
   619     % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally  | 
         | 
   620     % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've  | 
         | 
   621     % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an  | 
         | 
   622     % empty paragraph.  | 
         | 
   623     \ifx\par\lisppar  | 
         | 
   624       \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}% | 
         | 
   625       %  | 
         | 
   626       % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.  | 
         | 
   627       \obeylines  | 
         | 
   628     \fi  | 
         | 
   629     %  | 
         | 
   630     % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as  | 
         | 
   631     % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an  | 
         | 
   632     % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after  | 
         | 
   633     % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group  | 
         | 
   634     % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo  | 
         | 
   635     % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.  | 
         | 
   636     \comment  | 
         | 
   637 }  | 
         | 
   638 %  | 
         | 
   639 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help  | 
         | 
   640 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.  | 
         | 
   641 %  | 
         | 
   642 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% | 
         | 
   643 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%  | 
         | 
   644 where each line of input produces a line of output.}  | 
         | 
   645   | 
         | 
   646 % @need space-in-mils  | 
         | 
   647 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.  | 
         | 
   648   | 
         | 
   649 \newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in  | 
         | 
   650   | 
         | 
   651 \def\need{\parsearg\needx} | 
         | 
   652   | 
         | 
   653 % Old definition--didn't work.  | 
         | 
   654 %\def\needx #1{\par % | 
         | 
   655 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally  | 
         | 
   656 %% if the depth of the box does not fit.  | 
         | 
   657 %{\baselineskip=0pt% | 
         | 
   658 %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak | 
         | 
   659 %\prevdepth=-1000pt  | 
         | 
   660 %}}  | 
         | 
   661   | 
         | 
   662 \def\needx#1{% | 
         | 
   663   % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a  | 
         | 
   664   % paragraph.  | 
         | 
   665   \par  | 
         | 
   666   %  | 
         | 
   667   % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.  | 
         | 
   668   \dimen0 = #1\mil  | 
         | 
   669   \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox  | 
         | 
   670   \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox  | 
         | 
   671   \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2  | 
         | 
   672     %  | 
         | 
   673     % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the  | 
         | 
   674     % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.  | 
         | 
   675     % And a page break here is fine.  | 
         | 
   676     \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% | 
         | 
   677     %  | 
         | 
   678     % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the  | 
         | 
   679     % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the  | 
         | 
   680     % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider  | 
         | 
   681     % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the  | 
         | 
   682     % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.  | 
         | 
   683     %  | 
         | 
   684     % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the  | 
         | 
   685     % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in  | 
         | 
   686     % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which  | 
         | 
   687     % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing  | 
         | 
   688     % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an  | 
         | 
   689     % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real  | 
         | 
   690     % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.  | 
         | 
   691     \penalty9999  | 
         | 
   692     %  | 
         | 
   693     % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.  | 
         | 
   694     \kern -#1\mil  | 
         | 
   695     %  | 
         | 
   696     % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.  | 
         | 
   697     \nobreak  | 
         | 
   698   \fi  | 
         | 
   699 }  | 
         | 
   700   | 
         | 
   701 % @br   forces paragraph break  | 
         | 
   702   | 
         | 
   703 \let\br = \par  | 
         | 
   704   | 
         | 
   705 % @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font. | 
         | 
   706 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter  | 
         | 
   707 % font as three actual period characters.  | 
         | 
   708 %  | 
         | 
   709 \def\dots{% | 
         | 
   710   \leavevmode  | 
         | 
   711   \hbox to 1.5em{% | 
         | 
   712     \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil  | 
         | 
   713     .\hss.\hss.%  | 
         | 
   714     \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil  | 
         | 
   715   }%  | 
         | 
   716 }  | 
         | 
   717   | 
         | 
   718 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. | 
         | 
   719 %  | 
         | 
   720 \def\enddots{% | 
         | 
   721   \leavevmode  | 
         | 
   722   \hbox to 2em{% | 
         | 
   723     \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil  | 
         | 
   724     .\hss.\hss.\hss.%  | 
         | 
   725     \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil  | 
         | 
   726   }%  | 
         | 
   727   \spacefactor=3000  | 
         | 
   728 }  | 
         | 
   729   | 
         | 
   730 % @page forces the start of a new page.  | 
         | 
   731 %  | 
         | 
   732 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} | 
         | 
   733   | 
         | 
   734 % @exdent text....  | 
         | 
   735 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin  | 
         | 
   736   | 
         | 
   737 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.  | 
         | 
   738 % That's how much \exdent should take out.  | 
         | 
   739 \newskip\exdentamount  | 
         | 
   740   | 
         | 
   741 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.  | 
         | 
   742 \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy} | 
         | 
   743 \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} | 
         | 
   744   | 
         | 
   745 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.  | 
         | 
   746 \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy} | 
         | 
   747 \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount | 
         | 
   748 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} | 
         | 
   749   | 
         | 
   750 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current | 
         | 
   751 % paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion  | 
         | 
   752 % class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.  | 
         | 
   753 %  | 
         | 
   754 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm  | 
         | 
   755 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} | 
         | 
   756 %  | 
         | 
   757 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% | 
         | 
   758   \nobreak  | 
         | 
   759   \kern-\strutdepth  | 
         | 
   760   \vtop to \strutdepth{% | 
         | 
   761     \baselineskip=\strutdepth  | 
         | 
   762     \vss  | 
         | 
   763     % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to  | 
         | 
   764     % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.  | 
         | 
   765     \ifx#1l%  | 
         | 
   766       \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% | 
         | 
   767     \else  | 
         | 
   768       \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% | 
         | 
   769     \fi  | 
         | 
   770     \null  | 
         | 
   771   }%  | 
         | 
   772 }}  | 
         | 
   773 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} | 
         | 
   774 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} | 
         | 
   775 %  | 
         | 
   776 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} | 
         | 
   777 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;  | 
         | 
   778 % else use TEXT for both).  | 
         | 
   779 %  | 
         | 
   780 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} | 
         | 
   781 \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. | 
         | 
   782   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | 
         | 
   783   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt  | 
         | 
   784     \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts | 
         | 
   785     \def\righttext{#2}% | 
         | 
   786   \else  | 
         | 
   787     \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text | 
         | 
   788     \def\righttext{#1}% | 
         | 
   789   \fi  | 
         | 
   790   %  | 
         | 
   791   \ifodd\pageno  | 
         | 
   792     \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin | 
         | 
   793   \else  | 
         | 
   794     \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% | 
         | 
   795   \fi  | 
         | 
   796   \temp  | 
         | 
   797 }  | 
         | 
   798   | 
         | 
   799 % @include file    insert text of that file as input.  | 
         | 
   800 % Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).  | 
         | 
   801 \def\include{\begingroup | 
         | 
   802   \catcode`\\=\other  | 
         | 
   803   \catcode`~=\other  | 
         | 
   804   \catcode`^=\other  | 
         | 
   805   \catcode`_=\other  | 
         | 
   806   \catcode`|=\other  | 
         | 
   807   \catcode`<=\other  | 
         | 
   808   \catcode`>=\other  | 
         | 
   809   \catcode`+=\other  | 
         | 
   810   \parsearg\includezzz}  | 
         | 
   811 % Restore active chars for included file.  | 
         | 
   812 \def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup | 
         | 
   813   % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.  | 
         | 
   814   \def\thisfile{#1}% | 
         | 
   815   \let\value=\expandablevalue  | 
         | 
   816   \input\thisfile  | 
         | 
   817 \endgroup}  | 
         | 
   818   | 
         | 
   819 \def\thisfile{} | 
         | 
   820   | 
         | 
   821 % @center line  | 
         | 
   822 % outputs that line, centered.  | 
         | 
   823 %  | 
         | 
   824 \def\center{\parsearg\docenter} | 
         | 
   825 \def\docenter#1{{% | 
         | 
   826   \ifhmode \hfil\break \fi  | 
         | 
   827   \advance\hsize by -\leftskip  | 
         | 
   828   \advance\hsize by -\rightskip  | 
         | 
   829   \line{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% | 
         | 
   830   \ifhmode \break \fi  | 
         | 
   831 }}  | 
         | 
   832   | 
         | 
   833 % @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space  | 
         | 
   834   | 
         | 
   835 \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx} | 
         | 
   836 \def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip} | 
         | 
   837   | 
         | 
   838 % @comment ...line which is ignored...  | 
         | 
   839 % @c is the same as @comment  | 
         | 
   840 % @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment  | 
         | 
   841   | 
         | 
   842 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% | 
         | 
   843 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% | 
         | 
   844 \commentxxx}  | 
         | 
   845 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} | 
         | 
   846   | 
         | 
   847 \let\c=\comment  | 
         | 
   848   | 
         | 
   849 % @paragraphindent NCHARS  | 
         | 
   850 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.  | 
         | 
   851 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.  | 
         | 
   852 % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.  | 
         | 
   853 %  | 
         | 
   854 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords | 
         | 
   855 \def\noneword{none} | 
         | 
   856 %  | 
         | 
   857 \def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent} | 
         | 
   858 \def\doparagraphindent#1{% | 
         | 
   859   \def\temp{#1}% | 
         | 
   860   \ifx\temp\asisword  | 
         | 
   861   \else  | 
         | 
   862     \ifx\temp\noneword  | 
         | 
   863       \defaultparindent = 0pt  | 
         | 
   864     \else  | 
         | 
   865       \defaultparindent = #1em  | 
         | 
   866     \fi  | 
         | 
   867   \fi  | 
         | 
   868   \parindent = \defaultparindent  | 
         | 
   869 }  | 
         | 
   870   | 
         | 
   871 % @exampleindent NCHARS  | 
         | 
   872 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.  | 
         | 
   873 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but  | 
         | 
   874 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.  | 
         | 
   875 \def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent} | 
         | 
   876 \def\doexampleindent#1{% | 
         | 
   877   \def\temp{#1}% | 
         | 
   878   \ifx\temp\asisword  | 
         | 
   879   \else  | 
         | 
   880     \ifx\temp\noneword  | 
         | 
   881       \lispnarrowing = 0pt  | 
         | 
   882     \else  | 
         | 
   883       \lispnarrowing = #1em  | 
         | 
   884     \fi  | 
         | 
   885   \fi  | 
         | 
   886 }  | 
         | 
   887   | 
         | 
   888 % @firstparagraphindent WORD  | 
         | 
   889 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph  | 
         | 
   890 % after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such  | 
         | 
   891 % paragraphs.  | 
         | 
   892 %  | 
         | 
   893 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling  | 
         | 
   894 % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.  | 
         | 
   895 % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.  | 
         | 
   896 % By default, we suppress indentation.  | 
         | 
   897 %  | 
         | 
   898 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} | 
         | 
   899 \newdimen\currentparindent  | 
         | 
   900 %  | 
         | 
   901 \def\insertword{insert} | 
         | 
   902 %  | 
         | 
   903 \def\firstparagraphindent{\parsearg\dofirstparagraphindent} | 
         | 
   904 \def\dofirstparagraphindent#1{% | 
         | 
   905   \def\temp{#1}% | 
         | 
   906   \ifx\temp\noneword  | 
         | 
   907     \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent  | 
         | 
   908   \else\ifx\temp\insertword  | 
         | 
   909     \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax  | 
         | 
   910   \else  | 
         | 
   911     \errhelp = \EMsimple  | 
         | 
   912     \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% | 
         | 
   913   \fi\fi  | 
         | 
   914 }  | 
         | 
   915   | 
         | 
   916 % Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to  | 
         | 
   917 % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.  | 
         | 
   918 %  | 
         | 
   919 % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next  | 
         | 
   920 % paragraph.  | 
         | 
   921 %  | 
         | 
   922 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% | 
         | 
   923   \gdef\indent{% | 
         | 
   924     \global\let\indent=\ptexindent  | 
         | 
   925     \global\everypar = {}% | 
         | 
   926   }%  | 
         | 
   927   \global\everypar = {% | 
         | 
   928     \kern-\parindent  | 
         | 
   929     \global\let\indent=\ptexindent  | 
         | 
   930     \global\everypar = {}% | 
         | 
   931   }%  | 
         | 
   932 }%  | 
         | 
   933   | 
         | 
   934   | 
         | 
   935 % @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.  | 
         | 
   936 %  | 
         | 
   937 \def\asis#1{#1} | 
         | 
   938   | 
         | 
   939 % @math outputs its argument in math mode.  | 
         | 
   940 % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need  | 
         | 
   941 % to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,  | 
         | 
   942 % superscripts, special math chars, etc.  | 
         | 
   943 %  | 
         | 
   944 \let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix  | 
         | 
   945 %  | 
         | 
   946 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean  | 
         | 
   947 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make | 
         | 
   948 % _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing  | 
         | 
   949 % if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.  | 
         | 
   950 %  | 
         | 
   951 {\catcode\underChar = \active | 
         | 
   952 \gdef\mathunderscore{% | 
         | 
   953   \catcode\underChar=\active  | 
         | 
   954   \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% | 
         | 
   955 }}  | 
         | 
   956 %  | 
         | 
   957 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.  | 
         | 
   958 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but  | 
         | 
   959 % this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not  | 
         | 
   960 % otherwise define @\.  | 
         | 
   961 %  | 
         | 
   962 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.  | 
         | 
   963 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} | 
         | 
   964 %  | 
         | 
   965 \def\math{% | 
         | 
   966   \tex  | 
         | 
   967   \mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore  | 
         | 
   968   \let\\ = \mathbackslash  | 
         | 
   969   \mathactive  | 
         | 
   970   \implicitmath\finishmath}  | 
         | 
   971 \def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex} | 
         | 
   972   | 
         | 
   973 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.  | 
         | 
   974 % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an  | 
         | 
   975 % argument to a command which set the catcodes (such as @item or @section).  | 
         | 
   976 %  | 
         | 
   977 { | 
         | 
   978   \catcode`^ = \active  | 
         | 
   979   \catcode`< = \active  | 
         | 
   980   \catcode`> = \active  | 
         | 
   981   \catcode`+ = \active  | 
         | 
   982   \gdef\mathactive{% | 
         | 
   983     \let^ = \ptexhat  | 
         | 
   984     \let< = \ptexless  | 
         | 
   985     \let> = \ptexgtr  | 
         | 
   986     \let+ = \ptexplus  | 
         | 
   987   }  | 
         | 
   988 }  | 
         | 
   989   | 
         | 
   990 % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.  | 
         | 
   991 \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath} | 
         | 
   992 \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath} | 
         | 
   993   | 
         | 
   994 % @refill is a no-op.  | 
         | 
   995 \let\refill=\relax  | 
         | 
   996   | 
         | 
   997 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to  | 
         | 
   998 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.  | 
         | 
   999 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).  | 
         | 
  1000 %  | 
         | 
  1001 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.  | 
         | 
  1002 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse  | 
         | 
  1003   | 
         | 
  1004 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.  | 
         | 
  1005 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.  | 
         | 
  1006 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.  | 
         | 
  1007 \def\setfilename{% | 
         | 
  1008    \iflinks  | 
         | 
  1009      \readauxfile  | 
         | 
  1010    \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.  | 
         | 
  1011    \openindices  | 
         | 
  1012    \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.  | 
         | 
  1013    \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.  | 
         | 
  1014    %  | 
         | 
  1015    % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.  | 
         | 
  1016    % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.  | 
         | 
  1017    % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.  | 
         | 
  1018    \openin 1 texinfo.cnf  | 
         | 
  1019    \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi | 
         | 
  1020    \closein1  | 
         | 
  1021    \temp  | 
         | 
  1022    %  | 
         | 
  1023    \comment % Ignore the actual filename.  | 
         | 
  1024 }  | 
         | 
  1025   | 
         | 
  1026 % Called from \setfilename.  | 
         | 
  1027 %  | 
         | 
  1028 \def\openindices{% | 
         | 
  1029   \newindex{cp}% | 
         | 
  1030   \newcodeindex{fn}% | 
         | 
  1031   \newcodeindex{vr}% | 
         | 
  1032   \newcodeindex{tp}% | 
         | 
  1033   \newcodeindex{ky}% | 
         | 
  1034   \newcodeindex{pg}% | 
         | 
  1035 }  | 
         | 
  1036   | 
         | 
  1037 % @bye.  | 
         | 
  1038 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} | 
         | 
  1039   | 
         | 
  1040   | 
         | 
  1041 \message{pdf,} | 
         | 
  1042 % adobe `portable' document format  | 
         | 
  1043 \newcount\tempnum  | 
         | 
  1044 \newcount\lnkcount  | 
         | 
  1045 \newtoks\filename  | 
         | 
  1046 \newcount\filenamelength  | 
         | 
  1047 \newcount\pgn  | 
         | 
  1048 \newtoks\toksA  | 
         | 
  1049 \newtoks\toksB  | 
         | 
  1050 \newtoks\toksC  | 
         | 
  1051 \newtoks\toksD  | 
         | 
  1052 \newbox\boxA  | 
         | 
  1053 \newcount\countA  | 
         | 
  1054 \newif\ifpdf  | 
         | 
  1055 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest  | 
         | 
  1056   | 
         | 
  1057 \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined  | 
         | 
  1058   \pdffalse  | 
         | 
  1059   \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble  | 
         | 
  1060   \let\pdfurl = \gobble  | 
         | 
  1061   \let\endlink = \relax  | 
         | 
  1062   \let\linkcolor = \relax  | 
         | 
  1063   \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax  | 
         | 
  1064 \else  | 
         | 
  1065   \pdftrue  | 
         | 
  1066   \pdfoutput = 1  | 
         | 
  1067   \input pdfcolor  | 
         | 
  1068   \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  1069     \def\imagewidth{#2}% | 
         | 
  1070     \def\imageheight{#3}% | 
         | 
  1071     % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is  | 
         | 
  1072     % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)  | 
         | 
  1073     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14  | 
         | 
  1074       \immediate\pdfimage  | 
         | 
  1075     \else  | 
         | 
  1076       \immediate\pdfximage  | 
         | 
  1077     \fi  | 
         | 
  1078       \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi  | 
         | 
  1079       \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi  | 
         | 
  1080       \ifnum\pdftexversion<13  | 
         | 
  1081          #1.pdf%  | 
         | 
  1082        \else  | 
         | 
  1083          {#1.pdf}% | 
         | 
  1084        \fi  | 
         | 
  1085     \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else  | 
         | 
  1086       \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage  | 
         | 
  1087     \fi}  | 
         | 
  1088   \def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}} | 
         | 
  1089   \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} | 
         | 
  1090   \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?  | 
         | 
  1091   \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink} | 
         | 
  1092   % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines  | 
         | 
  1093   % come from Petr Olsak  | 
         | 
  1094   \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% | 
         | 
  1095     \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}  | 
         | 
  1096   \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax | 
         | 
  1097     \advance\tempnum by1  | 
         | 
  1098     \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} | 
         | 
  1099   \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{% | 
         | 
  1100     \openin 1 \jobname.toc  | 
         | 
  1101     \ifeof 1\else\begingroup  | 
         | 
  1102       \closein 1  | 
         | 
  1103       % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks  | 
         | 
  1104       \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace | 
         | 
  1105       \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace | 
         | 
  1106       %  | 
         | 
  1107       \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{} | 
         | 
  1108       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}} | 
         | 
  1109       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}} | 
         | 
  1110       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}} | 
         | 
  1111       \let\appendixentry = \chapentry  | 
         | 
  1112       \let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry  | 
         | 
  1113       \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry  | 
         | 
  1114       \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry  | 
         | 
  1115       \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry  | 
         | 
  1116       \input \jobname.toc  | 
         | 
  1117       \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{% | 
         | 
  1118         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}} | 
         | 
  1119       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{% | 
         | 
  1120         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}} | 
         | 
  1121       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{% | 
         | 
  1122         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}} | 
         | 
  1123       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{% | 
         | 
  1124         \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}} | 
         | 
  1125       \let\appendixentry = \chapentry  | 
         | 
  1126       \let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry  | 
         | 
  1127       \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry  | 
         | 
  1128       \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry  | 
         | 
  1129       \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry  | 
         | 
  1130       %  | 
         | 
  1131       % Make special characters normal for writing to the pdf file.  | 
         | 
  1132       %  | 
         | 
  1133       \indexnofonts  | 
         | 
  1134       \let\tt=\relax  | 
         | 
  1135       \turnoffactive  | 
         | 
  1136       \input \jobname.toc  | 
         | 
  1137     \endgroup\fi  | 
         | 
  1138   }}  | 
         | 
  1139   \def\makelinks #1,{% | 
         | 
  1140     \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}% | 
         | 
  1141     \ifx\params\E  | 
         | 
  1142       \let\nextmakelinks=\relax  | 
         | 
  1143     \else  | 
         | 
  1144       \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks  | 
         | 
  1145       \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi  | 
         | 
  1146       \picknum{#1}% | 
         | 
  1147       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} | 
         | 
  1148         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}% | 
         | 
  1149       \linkcolor #1%  | 
         | 
  1150       \advance\lnkcount by 1%  | 
         | 
  1151       \endlink  | 
         | 
  1152     \fi  | 
         | 
  1153     \nextmakelinks  | 
         | 
  1154   }  | 
         | 
  1155   \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1} | 
         | 
  1156   \def\pn#1{% | 
         | 
  1157     \def\p{#1}% | 
         | 
  1158     \ifx\p\lbrace  | 
         | 
  1159       \let\nextpn=\ppn  | 
         | 
  1160     \else  | 
         | 
  1161       \let\nextpn=\ppnn  | 
         | 
  1162       \def\first{#1} | 
         | 
  1163     \fi  | 
         | 
  1164     \nextpn  | 
         | 
  1165   }  | 
         | 
  1166   \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble} | 
         | 
  1167   \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first} | 
         | 
  1168   \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,} | 
         | 
  1169   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} | 
         | 
  1170   \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% | 
         | 
  1171     \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax  | 
         | 
  1172     \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces  | 
         | 
  1173       \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% | 
         | 
  1174         \advance\filenamelength by 1  | 
         | 
  1175       \fi  | 
         | 
  1176     \fi  | 
         | 
  1177     \nextsp}  | 
         | 
  1178   \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} | 
         | 
  1179   \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14  | 
         | 
  1180     \let \startlink \pdfannotlink  | 
         | 
  1181   \else  | 
         | 
  1182     \let \startlink \pdfstartlink  | 
         | 
  1183   \fi  | 
         | 
  1184   \def\pdfurl#1{% | 
         | 
  1185     \begingroup  | 
         | 
  1186       \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}% | 
         | 
  1187       \let\value=\expandablevalue  | 
         | 
  1188       \leavevmode\Red  | 
         | 
  1189       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | 
         | 
  1190         user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% | 
         | 
  1191         % #1  | 
         | 
  1192     \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  1193   \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} | 
         | 
  1194   \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} | 
         | 
  1195   \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} | 
         | 
  1196   \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} | 
         | 
  1197   \def\maketoks{% | 
         | 
  1198     \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|  | 
         | 
  1199     \ifx\first0\adn0  | 
         | 
  1200     \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3  | 
         | 
  1201     \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6  | 
         | 
  1202     \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9  | 
         | 
  1203     \else  | 
         | 
  1204       \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi  | 
         | 
  1205       \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else  | 
         | 
  1206         \let\next=\maketoks  | 
         | 
  1207         \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} | 
         | 
  1208         \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi | 
         | 
  1209       \fi  | 
         | 
  1210     \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi  | 
         | 
  1211     \next}  | 
         | 
  1212   \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% | 
         | 
  1213     {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} | 
         | 
  1214   \def\pdflink#1{% | 
         | 
  1215     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} | 
         | 
  1216     \linkcolor #1\endlink}  | 
         | 
  1217   \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} | 
         | 
  1218 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput  | 
         | 
  1219   | 
         | 
  1220   | 
         | 
  1221 \message{fonts,} | 
         | 
  1222 % Font-change commands.  | 
         | 
  1223   | 
         | 
  1224 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.  | 
         | 
  1225 % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.  | 
         | 
  1226 \newfam\sffam  | 
         | 
  1227 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf} | 
         | 
  1228 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.  | 
         | 
  1229   | 
         | 
  1230 % We don't need math for this one.  | 
         | 
  1231 \def\ttsl{\tenttsl} | 
         | 
  1232   | 
         | 
  1233 % Default leading.  | 
         | 
  1234 \newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt  | 
         | 
  1235   | 
         | 
  1236 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size  | 
         | 
  1237 % correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers  | 
         | 
  1238 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.  | 
         | 
  1239 %  | 
         | 
  1240 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} | 
         | 
  1241 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} | 
         | 
  1242 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} | 
         | 
  1243 %  | 
         | 
  1244 \def\setleading#1{% | 
         | 
  1245   \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax  | 
         | 
  1246   \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip  | 
         | 
  1247   \normalbaselines  | 
         | 
  1248   \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% | 
         | 
  1249     \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip  | 
         | 
  1250                     depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip  | 
         | 
  1251   }%  | 
         | 
  1252 }  | 
         | 
  1253   | 
         | 
  1254 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the  | 
         | 
  1255 % specified font prefix (normally `cm').  | 
         | 
  1256 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor  | 
         | 
  1257 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4} | 
         | 
  1258   | 
         | 
  1259 % Use cm as the default font prefix.  | 
         | 
  1260 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix  | 
         | 
  1261 % before you read in texinfo.tex.  | 
         | 
  1262 \ifx\fontprefix\undefined  | 
         | 
  1263 \def\fontprefix{cm} | 
         | 
  1264 \fi  | 
         | 
  1265 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.  | 
         | 
  1266 \def\rmshape{r} | 
         | 
  1267 \def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold | 
         | 
  1268 \def\bfshape{b} | 
         | 
  1269 \def\bxshape{bx} | 
         | 
  1270 \def\ttshape{tt} | 
         | 
  1271 \def\ttbshape{tt} | 
         | 
  1272 \def\ttslshape{sltt} | 
         | 
  1273 \def\itshape{ti} | 
         | 
  1274 \def\itbshape{bxti} | 
         | 
  1275 \def\slshape{sl} | 
         | 
  1276 \def\slbshape{bxsl} | 
         | 
  1277 \def\sfshape{ss} | 
         | 
  1278 \def\sfbshape{ss} | 
         | 
  1279 \def\scshape{csc} | 
         | 
  1280 \def\scbshape{csc} | 
         | 
  1281   | 
         | 
  1282 \newcount\mainmagstep  | 
         | 
  1283 \ifx\bigger\relax  | 
         | 
  1284   % not really supported.  | 
         | 
  1285   \mainmagstep=\magstep1  | 
         | 
  1286   \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000} | 
         | 
  1287   \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000} | 
         | 
  1288 \else  | 
         | 
  1289   \mainmagstep=\magstephalf  | 
         | 
  1290   \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
         | 
  1291   \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
         | 
  1292 \fi  | 
         | 
  1293 % Instead of cmb10, you may want to use cmbx10.  | 
         | 
  1294 % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10  | 
         | 
  1295 % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10  | 
         | 
  1296 % (in Bob's opinion).  | 
         | 
  1297 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
         | 
  1298 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
         | 
  1299 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
         | 
  1300 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
         | 
  1301 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
         | 
  1302 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | 
         | 
  1303 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep  | 
         | 
  1304 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep  | 
         | 
  1305   | 
         | 
  1306 % A few fonts for @defun, etc.  | 
         | 
  1307 \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314 | 
         | 
  1308 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} | 
         | 
  1309 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf} | 
         | 
  1310   | 
         | 
  1311 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).  | 
         | 
  1312 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000} | 
         | 
  1313 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000} | 
         | 
  1314 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900} | 
         | 
  1315 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000} | 
         | 
  1316 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000} | 
         | 
  1317 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000} | 
         | 
  1318 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900} | 
         | 
  1319 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} | 
         | 
  1320 \font\smalli=cmmi9  | 
         | 
  1321 \font\smallsy=cmsy9  | 
         | 
  1322   | 
         | 
  1323 % Fonts for small examples (8pt).  | 
         | 
  1324 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000} | 
         | 
  1325 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000} | 
         | 
  1326 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800} | 
         | 
  1327 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000} | 
         | 
  1328 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000} | 
         | 
  1329 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000} | 
         | 
  1330 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800} | 
         | 
  1331 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800} | 
         | 
  1332 \font\smalleri=cmmi8  | 
         | 
  1333 \font\smallersy=cmsy8  | 
         | 
  1334   | 
         | 
  1335 % Fonts for title page:  | 
         | 
  1336 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} | 
         | 
  1337 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} | 
         | 
  1338 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} | 
         | 
  1339 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} | 
         | 
  1340 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} | 
         | 
  1341 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} | 
         | 
  1342 \let\titlebf=\titlerm  | 
         | 
  1343 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} | 
         | 
  1344 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3  | 
         | 
  1345 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4  | 
         | 
  1346 \def\authorrm{\secrm} | 
         | 
  1347 \def\authortt{\sectt} | 
         | 
  1348   | 
         | 
  1349 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).  | 
         | 
  1350 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} | 
         | 
  1351 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3} | 
         | 
  1352 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} | 
         | 
  1353 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} | 
         | 
  1354 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} | 
         | 
  1355 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000} | 
         | 
  1356 \let\chapbf=\chaprm  | 
         | 
  1357 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} | 
         | 
  1358 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2  | 
         | 
  1359 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3  | 
         | 
  1360   | 
         | 
  1361 % Section fonts (14.4pt).  | 
         | 
  1362 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} | 
         | 
  1363 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} | 
         | 
  1364 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} | 
         | 
  1365 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} | 
         | 
  1366 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} | 
         | 
  1367 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} | 
         | 
  1368 \let\secbf\secrm  | 
         | 
  1369 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} | 
         | 
  1370 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1  | 
         | 
  1371 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2  | 
         | 
  1372   | 
         | 
  1373 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).  | 
         | 
  1374 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | 
         | 
  1375 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} | 
         | 
  1376 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} | 
         | 
  1377 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | 
         | 
  1378 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315} | 
         | 
  1379 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | 
         | 
  1380 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm  | 
         | 
  1381 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1} | 
         | 
  1382 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf  | 
         | 
  1383 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315  | 
         | 
  1384 % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,  | 
         | 
  1385 % but that is not a standard magnification.  | 
         | 
  1386   | 
         | 
  1387 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,  | 
         | 
  1388 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since  | 
         | 
  1389 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except  | 
         | 
  1390 % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and  | 
         | 
  1391 % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).  | 
         | 
  1392 %  | 
         | 
  1393 \def\resetmathfonts{% | 
         | 
  1394   \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy  | 
         | 
  1395   \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf  | 
         | 
  1396   \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf  | 
         | 
  1397 }  | 
         | 
  1398   | 
         | 
  1399 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead  | 
         | 
  1400 % of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work  | 
         | 
  1401 % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most  | 
         | 
  1402 % cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam | 
         | 
  1403 % \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to  | 
         | 
  1404 % redefine \bf itself.  | 
         | 
  1405 \def\textfonts{% | 
         | 
  1406   \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl  | 
         | 
  1407   \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc  | 
         | 
  1408   \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl  | 
         | 
  1409   \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} | 
         | 
  1410 \def\titlefonts{% | 
         | 
  1411   \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl  | 
         | 
  1412   \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc  | 
         | 
  1413   \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy  | 
         | 
  1414   \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl  | 
         | 
  1415   \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} | 
         | 
  1416 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} | 
         | 
  1417 \def\chapfonts{% | 
         | 
  1418   \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl  | 
         | 
  1419   \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc  | 
         | 
  1420   \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl  | 
         | 
  1421   \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} | 
         | 
  1422 \def\secfonts{% | 
         | 
  1423   \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl  | 
         | 
  1424   \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc  | 
         | 
  1425   \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl  | 
         | 
  1426   \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} | 
         | 
  1427 \def\subsecfonts{% | 
         | 
  1428   \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl  | 
         | 
  1429   \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc  | 
         | 
  1430   \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl  | 
         | 
  1431   \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} | 
         | 
  1432 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?  | 
         | 
  1433 \def\smallfonts{% | 
         | 
  1434   \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl  | 
         | 
  1435   \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc  | 
         | 
  1436   \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy  | 
         | 
  1437   \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl  | 
         | 
  1438   \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} | 
         | 
  1439 \def\smallerfonts{% | 
         | 
  1440   \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl  | 
         | 
  1441   \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc  | 
         | 
  1442   \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy  | 
         | 
  1443   \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl  | 
         | 
  1444   \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} | 
         | 
  1445   | 
         | 
  1446 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.  | 
         | 
  1447 \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts  | 
         | 
  1448   | 
         | 
  1449 % About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample  | 
         | 
  1450 % can fit this many characters:  | 
         | 
  1451 %   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69  | 
         | 
  1452 % If we use \smallerfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:  | 
         | 
  1453 %   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77  | 
         | 
  1454 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth  | 
         | 
  1455 % the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.  | 
         | 
  1456 %  | 
         | 
  1457 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):  | 
         | 
  1458 %   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58  | 
         | 
  1459 %  | 
         | 
  1460 % I wish we used A4 paper on this side of the Atlantic.  | 
         | 
  1461 %  | 
         | 
  1462 % --karl, 24jan03.  | 
         | 
  1463   | 
         | 
  1464   | 
         | 
  1465 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.  | 
         | 
  1466 %  | 
         | 
  1467 \textfonts  | 
         | 
  1468   | 
         | 
  1469 % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.  | 
         | 
  1470 \def\angleleft{$\langle$} | 
         | 
  1471 \def\angleright{$\rangle$} | 
         | 
  1472   | 
         | 
  1473 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks  | 
         | 
  1474 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0  | 
         | 
  1475   | 
         | 
  1476 % Fonts for short table of contents.  | 
         | 
  1477 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000} | 
         | 
  1478 \setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000} | 
         | 
  1479 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000} | 
         | 
  1480 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000} | 
         | 
  1481   | 
         | 
  1482 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans  | 
         | 
  1483 %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic  | 
         | 
  1484   | 
         | 
  1485 % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction | 
         | 
  1486 % unless the following character is such as not to need one.  | 
         | 
  1487 \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else | 
         | 
  1488                     \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}  | 
         | 
  1489 \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | 
         | 
  1490 \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | 
         | 
  1491   | 
         | 
  1492 \let\i=\smartitalic  | 
         | 
  1493 \let\var=\smartslanted  | 
         | 
  1494 \let\dfn=\smartslanted  | 
         | 
  1495 \let\emph=\smartitalic  | 
         | 
  1496 \let\cite=\smartslanted  | 
         | 
  1497   | 
         | 
  1498 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} | 
         | 
  1499 \let\strong=\b  | 
         | 
  1500   | 
         | 
  1501 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at  | 
         | 
  1502 % the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the  | 
         | 
  1503 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.  | 
         | 
  1504 %  | 
         | 
  1505 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} | 
         | 
  1506 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } | 
         | 
  1507   | 
         | 
  1508 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.  | 
         | 
  1509 % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and  | 
         | 
  1510 % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.  | 
         | 
  1511 %  | 
         | 
  1512 \catcode`@=11  | 
         | 
  1513   \def\frenchspacing{% | 
         | 
  1514     \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m  | 
         | 
  1515     \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m  | 
         | 
  1516   }  | 
         | 
  1517 \catcode`@=\other  | 
         | 
  1518   | 
         | 
  1519 \def\t#1{% | 
         | 
  1520   {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}% | 
         | 
  1521   \null  | 
         | 
  1522 }  | 
         | 
  1523 \let\ttfont=\t  | 
         | 
  1524 \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} | 
         | 
  1525 \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000} | 
         | 
  1526 \font\keysy=cmsy9  | 
         | 
  1527 \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% | 
         | 
  1528   \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% | 
         | 
  1529     \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt | 
         | 
  1530      \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% | 
         | 
  1531     \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%  | 
         | 
  1532   \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} | 
         | 
  1533 % The old definition, with no lozenge:  | 
         | 
  1534 %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} | 
         | 
  1535 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} | 
         | 
  1536   | 
         | 
  1537 % @file, @option are the same as @samp.  | 
         | 
  1538 \let\file=\samp  | 
         | 
  1539 \let\option=\samp  | 
         | 
  1540   | 
         | 
  1541 % @code is a modification of @t,  | 
         | 
  1542 % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.  | 
         | 
  1543 \def\tclose#1{% | 
         | 
  1544   {% | 
         | 
  1545     % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.  | 
         | 
  1546     \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font  | 
         | 
  1547     %  | 
         | 
  1548     % Switch to typewriter.  | 
         | 
  1549     \tt  | 
         | 
  1550     %  | 
         | 
  1551     % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.  | 
         | 
  1552     \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% | 
         | 
  1553     %  | 
         | 
  1554     % Turn off hyphenation.  | 
         | 
  1555     \nohyphenation  | 
         | 
  1556     %  | 
         | 
  1557     \rawbackslash  | 
         | 
  1558     \frenchspacing  | 
         | 
  1559     #1%  | 
         | 
  1560   }%  | 
         | 
  1561   \null  | 
         | 
  1562 }  | 
         | 
  1563   | 
         | 
  1564 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.  | 
         | 
  1565 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes  | 
         | 
  1566 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.  | 
         | 
  1567   | 
         | 
  1568 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control  | 
         | 
  1569 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.  | 
         | 
  1570 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)  | 
         | 
  1571 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.  | 
         | 
  1572 %  -- rms.  | 
         | 
  1573 { | 
         | 
  1574   \catcode`\-=\active  | 
         | 
  1575   \catcode`\_=\active  | 
         | 
  1576   %  | 
         | 
  1577   \global\def\code{\begingroup | 
         | 
  1578     \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash  | 
         | 
  1579     \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder  | 
         | 
  1580     \codex  | 
         | 
  1581   }  | 
         | 
  1582   %  | 
         | 
  1583   % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,  | 
         | 
  1584   % just treat them as a normal -.  | 
         | 
  1585   \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash} | 
         | 
  1586 }  | 
         | 
  1587   | 
         | 
  1588 \def\realdash{-} | 
         | 
  1589 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} | 
         | 
  1590 \def\codeunder{% | 
         | 
  1591   % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _ | 
         | 
  1592   % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)  | 
         | 
  1593   % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us  | 
         | 
  1594   % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.  | 
         | 
  1595   \ifusingtt{\ifmmode | 
         | 
  1596                \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.  | 
         | 
  1597              \else\normalunderscore \fi  | 
         | 
  1598              \discretionary{}{}{}}% | 
         | 
  1599             {\_}% | 
         | 
  1600 }  | 
         | 
  1601 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} | 
         | 
  1602   | 
         | 
  1603 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,  | 
         | 
  1604 % then @kbd has no effect.  | 
         | 
  1605   | 
         | 
  1606 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),  | 
         | 
  1607 %   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),  | 
         | 
  1608 %   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).  | 
         | 
  1609 \def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx} | 
         | 
  1610 \def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{% | 
         | 
  1611   \def\arg{#1}% | 
         | 
  1612   \ifx\arg\worddistinct  | 
         | 
  1613     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% | 
         | 
  1614   \else\ifx\arg\wordexample  | 
         | 
  1615     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% | 
         | 
  1616   \else\ifx\arg\wordcode  | 
         | 
  1617     \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% | 
         | 
  1618   \else  | 
         | 
  1619     \errhelp = \EMsimple  | 
         | 
  1620     \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\arg'}% | 
         | 
  1621   \fi\fi\fi  | 
         | 
  1622 }  | 
         | 
  1623 \def\worddistinct{distinct} | 
         | 
  1624 \def\wordexample{example} | 
         | 
  1625 \def\wordcode{code} | 
         | 
  1626   | 
         | 
  1627 % Default is `distinct.'  | 
         | 
  1628 \kbdinputstyle distinct  | 
         | 
  1629   | 
         | 
  1630 \def\xkey{\key} | 
         | 
  1631 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% | 
         | 
  1632 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% | 
         | 
  1633 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi | 
         | 
  1634 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} | 
         | 
  1635   | 
         | 
  1636 % For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.  | 
         | 
  1637 \let\url=\code  | 
         | 
  1638 \let\env=\code  | 
         | 
  1639 \let\command=\code  | 
         | 
  1640   | 
         | 
  1641 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)  | 
         | 
  1642 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third  | 
         | 
  1643 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url  | 
         | 
  1644 % itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in  | 
         | 
  1645 % a hypertex \special here.  | 
         | 
  1646 %  | 
         | 
  1647 \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} | 
         | 
  1648 \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup | 
         | 
  1649   \unsepspaces  | 
         | 
  1650   \pdfurl{#1}% | 
         | 
  1651   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% | 
         | 
  1652   \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt  | 
         | 
  1653     \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that  | 
         | 
  1654   \else  | 
         | 
  1655     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | 
         | 
  1656     \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt  | 
         | 
  1657       \ifpdf  | 
         | 
  1658         \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it  | 
         | 
  1659       \else  | 
         | 
  1660         \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url | 
         | 
  1661       \fi  | 
         | 
  1662     \else  | 
         | 
  1663       \code{#1}% only url given, so show it | 
         | 
  1664     \fi  | 
         | 
  1665   \fi  | 
         | 
  1666   \endlink  | 
         | 
  1667 \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  1668   | 
         | 
  1669 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.  | 
         | 
  1670 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.  | 
         | 
  1671 %  | 
         | 
  1672 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} | 
         | 
  1673 \ifpdf  | 
         | 
  1674   \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} | 
         | 
  1675   \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup | 
         | 
  1676     \unsepspaces  | 
         | 
  1677     \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% | 
         | 
  1678     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | 
         | 
  1679     \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi | 
         | 
  1680     \endlink  | 
         | 
  1681   \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  1682 \else  | 
         | 
  1683   \let\email=\uref  | 
         | 
  1684 \fi  | 
         | 
  1685   | 
         | 
  1686 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the  | 
         | 
  1687 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and  | 
         | 
  1688 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have  | 
         | 
  1689 % this property, we can check that font parameter.  | 
         | 
  1690 %  | 
         | 
  1691 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } | 
         | 
  1692   | 
         | 
  1693 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the  | 
         | 
  1694 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. | 
         | 
  1695 %  | 
         | 
  1696 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} | 
         | 
  1697   | 
         | 
  1698 \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} | 
         | 
  1699   | 
         | 
  1700 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',  | 
         | 
  1701 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for  | 
         | 
  1702 % Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.  | 
         | 
  1703 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} | 
         | 
  1704   | 
         | 
  1705 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.  | 
         | 
  1706 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font | 
         | 
  1707 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font | 
         | 
  1708 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font | 
         | 
  1709   | 
         | 
  1710 % @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.  | 
         | 
  1711 \def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}} | 
         | 
  1712   | 
         | 
  1713 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign. | 
         | 
  1714 \def\pounds{{\it\$}} | 
         | 
  1715   | 
         | 
  1716 % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  For now, only works in text size;  | 
         | 
  1717 % we'd have to redo the font mechanism to change the \scriptstyle and  | 
         | 
  1718 % \scriptscriptstyle font sizes to make it look right in headings.  | 
         | 
  1719 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.  | 
         | 
  1720 %  | 
         | 
  1721 \def\registeredsymbol{% | 
         | 
  1722   $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm R$}\hfil\crcr\Orb}}% | 
         | 
  1723     }$%  | 
         | 
  1724 }  | 
         | 
  1725   | 
         | 
  1726   | 
         | 
  1727 \message{page headings,} | 
         | 
  1728   | 
         | 
  1729 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in  | 
         | 
  1730 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc  | 
         | 
  1731   | 
         | 
  1732 % First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.  | 
         | 
  1733 \newif\ifseenauthor  | 
         | 
  1734 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage  | 
         | 
  1735   | 
         | 
  1736 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the  | 
         | 
  1737 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.  | 
         | 
  1738 %  | 
         | 
  1739 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage  | 
         | 
  1740  \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue  | 
         | 
  1741 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage  | 
         | 
  1742  \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue  | 
         | 
  1743   | 
         | 
  1744 \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz} | 
         | 
  1745 \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% | 
         | 
  1746         \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} | 
         | 
  1747   | 
         | 
  1748 \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts | 
         | 
  1749    \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm  | 
         | 
  1750    \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}% | 
         | 
  1751    %  | 
         | 
  1752    \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines | 
         | 
  1753                    \let\tt=\authortt}%  | 
         | 
  1754    %  | 
         | 
  1755    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.  | 
         | 
  1756    \vglue\titlepagetopglue  | 
         | 
  1757    %  | 
         | 
  1758    % Now you can print the title using @title.  | 
         | 
  1759    \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}% | 
         | 
  1760    \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1} | 
         | 
  1761                     % print a rule at the page bottom also.  | 
         | 
  1762                     \finishedtitlepagefalse  | 
         | 
  1763                     \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%  | 
         | 
  1764    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.  | 
         | 
  1765    \finishedtitlepagetrue  | 
         | 
  1766    %  | 
         | 
  1767    % Now you can put text using @subtitle.  | 
         | 
  1768    \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}% | 
         | 
  1769    \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}% | 
         | 
  1770    %  | 
         | 
  1771    % @author should come last, but may come many times.  | 
         | 
  1772    \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}% | 
         | 
  1773    \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi | 
         | 
  1774       {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}% | 
         | 
  1775    %  | 
         | 
  1776    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space  | 
         | 
  1777    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.  | 
         | 
  1778    \let\oldpage = \page  | 
         | 
  1779    \def\page{% | 
         | 
  1780       \iffinishedtitlepage\else  | 
         | 
  1781          \finishtitlepage  | 
         | 
  1782       \fi  | 
         | 
  1783       \oldpage  | 
         | 
  1784       \let\page = \oldpage  | 
         | 
  1785       \hbox{}}% | 
         | 
  1786 %   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}} | 
         | 
  1787 }  | 
         | 
  1788   | 
         | 
  1789 \def\Etitlepage{% | 
         | 
  1790    \iffinishedtitlepage\else  | 
         | 
  1791       \finishtitlepage  | 
         | 
  1792    \fi  | 
         | 
  1793    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,  | 
         | 
  1794    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.  | 
         | 
  1795    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page  | 
         | 
  1796    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.  | 
         | 
  1797    \oldpage  | 
         | 
  1798    \endgroup  | 
         | 
  1799    %  | 
         | 
  1800    % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are  | 
         | 
  1801    % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.  | 
         | 
  1802    \HEADINGSon  | 
         | 
  1803    %  | 
         | 
  1804    % If they want short, they certainly want long too.  | 
         | 
  1805    \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage  | 
         | 
  1806      \shortcontents  | 
         | 
  1807      \contents  | 
         | 
  1808      \global\let\shortcontents = \relax  | 
         | 
  1809      \global\let\contents = \relax  | 
         | 
  1810    \fi  | 
         | 
  1811    %  | 
         | 
  1812    \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage  | 
         | 
  1813      \contents  | 
         | 
  1814      \global\let\contents = \relax  | 
         | 
  1815      \global\let\shortcontents = \relax  | 
         | 
  1816    \fi  | 
         | 
  1817 }  | 
         | 
  1818   | 
         | 
  1819 \def\finishtitlepage{% | 
         | 
  1820    \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize  | 
         | 
  1821    \vskip\titlepagebottomglue  | 
         | 
  1822    \finishedtitlepagetrue  | 
         | 
  1823 }  | 
         | 
  1824   | 
         | 
  1825 %%% Set up page headings and footings.  | 
         | 
  1826   | 
         | 
  1827 \let\thispage=\folio  | 
         | 
  1828   | 
         | 
  1829 \newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages  | 
         | 
  1830 \newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages  | 
         | 
  1831 \newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages  | 
         | 
  1832 \newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages  | 
         | 
  1833   | 
         | 
  1834 % Now make Tex use those variables  | 
         | 
  1835 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline | 
         | 
  1836                             \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}  | 
         | 
  1837 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline | 
         | 
  1838                             \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}  | 
         | 
  1839 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax  | 
         | 
  1840   | 
         | 
  1841 % Commands to set those variables.  | 
         | 
  1842 % For example, this is what  @headings on  does  | 
         | 
  1843 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter  | 
         | 
  1844 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle  | 
         | 
  1845 % @evenfooting @thisfile||  | 
         | 
  1846 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile  | 
         | 
  1847   | 
         | 
  1848 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} | 
         | 
  1849 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} | 
         | 
  1850 \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx} | 
         | 
  1851   | 
         | 
  1852 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} | 
         | 
  1853 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} | 
         | 
  1854 \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx} | 
         | 
  1855   | 
         | 
  1856 {\catcode`\@=0 % | 
         | 
  1857   | 
         | 
  1858 \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} | 
         | 
  1859 \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% | 
         | 
  1860 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | 
         | 
  1861   | 
         | 
  1862 \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} | 
         | 
  1863 \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% | 
         | 
  1864 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | 
         | 
  1865   | 
         | 
  1866 \gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% | 
         | 
  1867   | 
         | 
  1868 \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} | 
         | 
  1869 \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% | 
         | 
  1870 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} | 
         | 
  1871   | 
         | 
  1872 \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} | 
         | 
  1873 \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% | 
         | 
  1874   \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% | 
         | 
  1875   %  | 
         | 
  1876   % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume  | 
         | 
  1877   % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.  | 
         | 
  1878   \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip  | 
         | 
  1879   \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip  | 
         | 
  1880 }  | 
         | 
  1881   | 
         | 
  1882 \gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} | 
         | 
  1883 %  | 
         | 
  1884 }% unbind the catcode of @.  | 
         | 
  1885   | 
         | 
  1886 % @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.  | 
         | 
  1887 % @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.  | 
         | 
  1888 % @headings off         turns them off.  | 
         | 
  1889 % @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.  | 
         | 
  1890 % @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.  | 
         | 
  1891 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.  | 
         | 
  1892 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.  | 
         | 
  1893 % By default, they are off at the start of a document,  | 
         | 
  1894 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.  | 
         | 
  1895   | 
         | 
  1896 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} | 
         | 
  1897   | 
         | 
  1898 \def\HEADINGSoff{ | 
         | 
  1899 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
         | 
  1900 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} | 
         | 
  1901 \HEADINGSoff  | 
         | 
  1902 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.  | 
         | 
  1903 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,  | 
         | 
  1904 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document  | 
         | 
  1905 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top  | 
         | 
  1906 % edge of all pages.  | 
         | 
  1907 \def\HEADINGSdouble{ | 
         | 
  1908 \global\pageno=1  | 
         | 
  1909 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
         | 
  1910 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | 
         | 
  1911 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | 
         | 
  1912 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
         | 
  1913 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage  | 
         | 
  1914 }  | 
         | 
  1915 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager  | 
         | 
  1916   | 
         | 
  1917 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,  | 
         | 
  1918 % page number on top right.  | 
         | 
  1919 \def\HEADINGSsingle{ | 
         | 
  1920 \global\pageno=1  | 
         | 
  1921 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
         | 
  1922 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | 
         | 
  1923 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
         | 
  1924 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
         | 
  1925 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager  | 
         | 
  1926 }  | 
         | 
  1927 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} | 
         | 
  1928   | 
         | 
  1929 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} | 
         | 
  1930 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter  | 
         | 
  1931 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% | 
         | 
  1932 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
         | 
  1933 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | 
         | 
  1934 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | 
         | 
  1935 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
         | 
  1936 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage  | 
         | 
  1937 }  | 
         | 
  1938   | 
         | 
  1939 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} | 
         | 
  1940 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% | 
         | 
  1941 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | 
         | 
  1942 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | 
         | 
  1943 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
         | 
  1944 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | 
         | 
  1945 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager  | 
         | 
  1946 }  | 
         | 
  1947   | 
         | 
  1948 % Subroutines used in generating headings  | 
         | 
  1949 % This produces Day Month Year style of output.  | 
         | 
  1950 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set  | 
         | 
  1951 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).  | 
         | 
  1952 \ifx\today\undefined  | 
         | 
  1953 \def\today{% | 
         | 
  1954   \number\day\space  | 
         | 
  1955   \ifcase\month  | 
         | 
  1956   \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr  | 
         | 
  1957   \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug  | 
         | 
  1958   \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec  | 
         | 
  1959   \fi  | 
         | 
  1960   \space\number\year}  | 
         | 
  1961 \fi  | 
         | 
  1962   | 
         | 
  1963 % @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.  | 
         | 
  1964 % It generates no output of its own.  | 
         | 
  1965 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} | 
         | 
  1966 \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz} | 
         | 
  1967 \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}} | 
         | 
  1968   | 
         | 
  1969   | 
         | 
  1970 \message{tables,} | 
         | 
  1971 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).  | 
         | 
  1972   | 
         | 
  1973 % default indentation of table text  | 
         | 
  1974 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in  | 
         | 
  1975 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text  | 
         | 
  1976 \newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in  | 
         | 
  1977 % margin between end of table item and start of table text.  | 
         | 
  1978 \newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in  | 
         | 
  1979   | 
         | 
  1980 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin  | 
         | 
  1981 \newdimen\itemmax  | 
         | 
  1982   | 
         | 
  1983 % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with  | 
         | 
  1984 % these defs.  | 
         | 
  1985 % They also define \itemindex  | 
         | 
  1986 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).  | 
         | 
  1987   | 
         | 
  1988 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip  | 
         | 
  1989   | 
         | 
  1990 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} | 
         | 
  1991   | 
         | 
  1992 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} | 
         | 
  1993 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} | 
         | 
  1994   | 
         | 
  1995 \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz} | 
         | 
  1996 \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz} | 
         | 
  1997   | 
         | 
  1998 \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz} | 
         | 
  1999 \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz} | 
         | 
  2000   | 
         | 
  2001 \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}% | 
         | 
  2002                  \itemzzz {#1}} | 
         | 
  2003   | 
         | 
  2004 \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}% | 
         | 
  2005                  \itemzzz {#1}} | 
         | 
  2006   | 
         | 
  2007 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % | 
         | 
  2008   \advance\hsize by -\rightskip  | 
         | 
  2009   \advance\hsize by -\tableindent  | 
         | 
  2010   \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}% | 
         | 
  2011   \itemindex{#1}% | 
         | 
  2012   \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.  | 
         | 
  2013   %  | 
         | 
  2014   % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line  | 
         | 
  2015   % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that  | 
         | 
  2016   % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next  | 
         | 
  2017   % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the  | 
         | 
  2018   % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.  | 
         | 
  2019   \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax  | 
         | 
  2020     %  | 
         | 
  2021     % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,  | 
         | 
  2022     % but leave it ragged-right.  | 
         | 
  2023     \begingroup  | 
         | 
  2024       \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent  | 
         | 
  2025       \advance\hsize by\tableindent  | 
         | 
  2026       \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil  | 
         | 
  2027       \leavevmode\unhbox0\par  | 
         | 
  2028     \endgroup  | 
         | 
  2029     %  | 
         | 
  2030     % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the  | 
         | 
  2031     % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.  | 
         | 
  2032     \nobreak \vskip-\parskip  | 
         | 
  2033     %  | 
         | 
  2034     % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  (Unfortunately  | 
         | 
  2035     % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following  | 
         | 
  2036     % \baselineskip glue.)  However, if what follows is an environment  | 
         | 
  2037     % such as @example, there will be no \parskip glue; then  | 
         | 
  2038     % the negative vskip we just would cause the example and the item to  | 
         | 
  2039     % crash together.  So we use this bizarre value of 10001 as a signal  | 
         | 
  2040     % to \aboveenvbreak to insert \parskip glue after all.  | 
         | 
  2041     % (Possibly there are other commands that could be followed by  | 
         | 
  2042     % @example which need the same treatment, but not section titles; or  | 
         | 
  2043     % maybe section titles are the only special case and they should be  | 
         | 
  2044     % penalty 10001...)  | 
         | 
  2045     \penalty 10001  | 
         | 
  2046     \endgroup  | 
         | 
  2047     \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse  | 
         | 
  2048   \else  | 
         | 
  2049     % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the  | 
         | 
  2050     % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.  | 
         | 
  2051     \noindent  | 
         | 
  2052     % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in  | 
         | 
  2053     % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and  | 
         | 
  2054     % eventually be printed.  | 
         | 
  2055     \nobreak\kern-\tableindent  | 
         | 
  2056     \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  | 
         | 
  2057     \unhbox0  | 
         | 
  2058     \nobreak\kern\dimen0  | 
         | 
  2059     \endgroup  | 
         | 
  2060     \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue  | 
         | 
  2061   \fi  | 
         | 
  2062 }  | 
         | 
  2063   | 
         | 
  2064 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}} | 
         | 
  2065 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}} | 
         | 
  2066 \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}} | 
         | 
  2067 \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}} | 
         | 
  2068 \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}} | 
         | 
  2069 \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}} | 
         | 
  2070   | 
         | 
  2071 % Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.  | 
         | 
  2072 \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}} | 
         | 
  2073   | 
         | 
  2074 % @table, @ftable, @vtable.  | 
         | 
  2075 \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex} | 
         | 
  2076 {\obeylines\obeyspaces% | 
         | 
  2077 \gdef\tablex #1^^M{% | 
         | 
  2078 \tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}  | 
         | 
  2079   | 
         | 
  2080 \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex} | 
         | 
  2081 {\obeylines\obeyspaces% | 
         | 
  2082 \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{% | 
         | 
  2083 \tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley  | 
         | 
  2084 \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% | 
         | 
  2085 \let\Etable=\relax}}  | 
         | 
  2086   | 
         | 
  2087 \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex} | 
         | 
  2088 {\obeylines\obeyspaces% | 
         | 
  2089 \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{% | 
         | 
  2090 \tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley  | 
         | 
  2091 \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% | 
         | 
  2092 \let\Etable=\relax}}  | 
         | 
  2093   | 
         | 
  2094 \def\dontindex #1{} | 
         | 
  2095 \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}% | 
         | 
  2096 \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}% | 
         | 
  2097   | 
         | 
  2098 {\obeyspaces % | 
         | 
  2099 \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup% | 
         | 
  2100 \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}} | 
         | 
  2101   | 
         | 
  2102 \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{% | 
         | 
  2103 \aboveenvbreak %  | 
         | 
  2104 \begingroup %  | 
         | 
  2105 \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge. | 
         | 
  2106 \let\itemindex=#1%  | 
         | 
  2107 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %  | 
         | 
  2108 \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %  | 
         | 
  2109 \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %  | 
         | 
  2110 \def\itemfont{#2}% | 
         | 
  2111 \itemmax=\tableindent %  | 
         | 
  2112 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %  | 
         | 
  2113 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent %  | 
         | 
  2114 \exdentamount=\tableindent  | 
         | 
  2115 \parindent = 0pt  | 
         | 
  2116 \parskip = \smallskipamount  | 
         | 
  2117 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%  | 
         | 
  2118 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% | 
         | 
  2119 \let\item = \internalBitem %  | 
         | 
  2120 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx %  | 
         | 
  2121 \let\kitem = \internalBkitem %  | 
         | 
  2122 \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %  | 
         | 
  2123 \let\xitem = \internalBxitem %  | 
         | 
  2124 \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %  | 
         | 
  2125 }  | 
         | 
  2126   | 
         | 
  2127 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize  | 
         | 
  2128   | 
         | 
  2129 \newcount \itemno  | 
         | 
  2130   | 
         | 
  2131 \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz} | 
         | 
  2132   | 
         | 
  2133 \def\itemizezzz #1{% | 
         | 
  2134   \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize  | 
         | 
  2135   \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize} | 
         | 
  2136 }  | 
         | 
  2137   | 
         | 
  2138 \def\itemizey#1#2{% | 
         | 
  2139   \aboveenvbreak  | 
         | 
  2140   \itemmax=\itemindent  | 
         | 
  2141   \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin  | 
         | 
  2142   \advance\leftskip by \itemindent  | 
         | 
  2143   \exdentamount=\itemindent  | 
         | 
  2144   \parindent=0pt  | 
         | 
  2145   \parskip=\smallskipamount  | 
         | 
  2146   \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi  | 
         | 
  2147   \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% | 
         | 
  2148   \def\itemcontents{#1}% | 
         | 
  2149   % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.  | 
         | 
  2150   \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi | 
         | 
  2151   \let\item=\itemizeitem  | 
         | 
  2152 }  | 
         | 
  2153   | 
         | 
  2154 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in  | 
         | 
  2155 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.  | 
         | 
  2156 %  | 
         | 
  2157 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% | 
         | 
  2158   | 
         | 
  2159 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,  | 
         | 
  2160 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No  | 
         | 
  2161 % argument is the same as `1'.  | 
         | 
  2162 %  | 
         | 
  2163 \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz} | 
         | 
  2164 \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey} | 
         | 
  2165 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% | 
         | 
  2166   \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate  | 
         | 
  2167   %  | 
         | 
  2168   % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.  | 
         | 
  2169   \def\thearg{#1}% | 
         | 
  2170   \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi | 
         | 
  2171   %  | 
         | 
  2172   % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a  | 
         | 
  2173   % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.  | 
         | 
  2174   % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.  | 
         | 
  2175   % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at  | 
         | 
  2176   % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)  | 
         | 
  2177   \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark  | 
         | 
  2178   \ifx\rest\empty  | 
         | 
  2179     % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.  | 
         | 
  2180     % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.  | 
         | 
  2181     % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and  | 
         | 
  2182     %   not equal to itself.  | 
         | 
  2183     % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.  | 
         | 
  2184     %  | 
         | 
  2185     % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from  | 
         | 
  2186     % continuing to look for a <number>.  | 
         | 
  2187     %  | 
         | 
  2188     \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax  | 
         | 
  2189       \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)  | 
         | 
  2190     \else  | 
         | 
  2191       % It's a letter.  | 
         | 
  2192       \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax  | 
         | 
  2193         \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter  | 
         | 
  2194       \else  | 
         | 
  2195         \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter  | 
         | 
  2196       \fi  | 
         | 
  2197     \fi  | 
         | 
  2198   \else  | 
         | 
  2199     % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.  | 
         | 
  2200     \numericenumerate  | 
         | 
  2201   \fi  | 
         | 
  2202 }  | 
         | 
  2203   | 
         | 
  2204 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is  | 
         | 
  2205 % given in \thearg.  | 
         | 
  2206 %  | 
         | 
  2207 \def\numericenumerate{% | 
         | 
  2208   \itemno = \thearg  | 
         | 
  2209   \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% | 
         | 
  2210 }  | 
         | 
  2211   | 
         | 
  2212 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.  | 
         | 
  2213 \def\lowercaseenumerate{% | 
         | 
  2214   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg  | 
         | 
  2215   \startenumeration{% | 
         | 
  2216     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.  | 
         | 
  2217     \ifnum\itemno=0  | 
         | 
  2218       \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | 
         | 
  2219                   alphabet}%  | 
         | 
  2220     \fi  | 
         | 
  2221     \char\lccode\itemno  | 
         | 
  2222   }%  | 
         | 
  2223 }  | 
         | 
  2224   | 
         | 
  2225 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.  | 
         | 
  2226 \def\uppercaseenumerate{% | 
         | 
  2227   \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg  | 
         | 
  2228   \startenumeration{% | 
         | 
  2229     % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.  | 
         | 
  2230     \ifnum\itemno=0  | 
         | 
  2231       \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | 
         | 
  2232                   alphabet}  | 
         | 
  2233     \fi  | 
         | 
  2234     \char\uccode\itemno  | 
         | 
  2235   }%  | 
         | 
  2236 }  | 
         | 
  2237   | 
         | 
  2238 % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the  | 
         | 
  2239 % common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in  | 
         | 
  2240 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.  | 
         | 
  2241 %  | 
         | 
  2242 \def\startenumeration#1{% | 
         | 
  2243   \advance\itemno by -1  | 
         | 
  2244   \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr | 
         | 
  2245 }  | 
         | 
  2246   | 
         | 
  2247 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg  | 
         | 
  2248 % to @enumerate.  | 
         | 
  2249 %  | 
         | 
  2250 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} | 
         | 
  2251 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} | 
         | 
  2252 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} | 
         | 
  2253 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} | 
         | 
  2254   | 
         | 
  2255 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize.  | 
         | 
  2256   | 
         | 
  2257 \def\itemizeitem{% | 
         | 
  2258 \advance\itemno by 1  | 
         | 
  2259 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% | 
         | 
  2260 \ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi | 
         | 
  2261 {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt | 
         | 
  2262 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}% | 
         | 
  2263 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% | 
         | 
  2264 \flushcr}  | 
         | 
  2265   | 
         | 
  2266 % @multitable macros  | 
         | 
  2267 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96  | 
         | 
  2268 %  | 
         | 
  2269 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.  | 
         | 
  2270 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width  | 
         | 
  2271 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,  | 
         | 
  2272 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.  | 
         | 
  2273   | 
         | 
  2274 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.  | 
         | 
  2275   | 
         | 
  2276 % To make preamble:  | 
         | 
  2277 %  | 
         | 
  2278 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:  | 
         | 
  2279 %   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45  | 
         | 
  2280 %   @item ...  | 
         | 
  2281 %  | 
         | 
  2282 %   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total  | 
         | 
  2283 %   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many  | 
         | 
  2284 %   columns as desired.  | 
         | 
  2285   | 
         | 
  2286   | 
         | 
  2287 % Or use a template:  | 
         | 
  2288 %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | 
         | 
  2289 %   @item ...  | 
         | 
  2290 %   using the widest term desired in each column.  | 
         | 
  2291 %  | 
         | 
  2292 % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in  | 
         | 
  2293 % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it  | 
         | 
  2294 % will parse correctly, i.e.,  | 
         | 
  2295 %  | 
         | 
  2296 %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 | 
         | 
  2297 %      template}  | 
         | 
  2298 % Not:  | 
         | 
  2299 %     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} | 
         | 
  2300 %      {Column 3 template} | 
         | 
  2301   | 
         | 
  2302 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column  | 
         | 
  2303 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's  | 
         | 
  2304 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,  | 
         | 
  2305 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.  | 
         | 
  2306   | 
         | 
  2307 % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their  | 
         | 
  2308 % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.  | 
         | 
  2309   | 
         | 
  2310 % Sample multitable:  | 
         | 
  2311   | 
         | 
  2312 %   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | 
         | 
  2313 %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col  | 
         | 
  2314 %   @item  | 
         | 
  2315 %   first col stuff  | 
         | 
  2316 %   @tab  | 
         | 
  2317 %   second col stuff  | 
         | 
  2318 %   @tab  | 
         | 
  2319 %   third col  | 
         | 
  2320 %   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff  | 
         | 
  2321 %   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.  | 
         | 
  2322 %  | 
         | 
  2323 %         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.  | 
         | 
  2324 %   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.  | 
         | 
  2325 %   @end multitable  | 
         | 
  2326   | 
         | 
  2327 % Default dimensions may be reset by user.  | 
         | 
  2328 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.  | 
         | 
  2329 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.  | 
         | 
  2330 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.  | 
         | 
  2331 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline  | 
         | 
  2332 %                                                            to baseline.  | 
         | 
  2333 %   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.  | 
         | 
  2334 %  | 
         | 
  2335 \newskip\multitableparskip  | 
         | 
  2336 \newskip\multitableparindent  | 
         | 
  2337 \newdimen\multitablecolspace  | 
         | 
  2338 \newskip\multitablelinespace  | 
         | 
  2339 \multitableparskip=0pt  | 
         | 
  2340 \multitableparindent=6pt  | 
         | 
  2341 \multitablecolspace=12pt  | 
         | 
  2342 \multitablelinespace=0pt  | 
         | 
  2343   | 
         | 
  2344 % Macros used to set up halign preamble:  | 
         | 
  2345 %  | 
         | 
  2346 \let\endsetuptable\relax  | 
         | 
  2347 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} | 
         | 
  2348 \let\columnfractions\relax  | 
         | 
  2349 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} | 
         | 
  2350 \newif\ifsetpercent  | 
         | 
  2351   | 
         | 
  2352 % #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which  | 
         | 
  2353 % is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we  | 
         | 
  2354 % just throw it away).  #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the  | 
         | 
  2355 % percent of \hsize for this column.  | 
         | 
  2356 \def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {% | 
         | 
  2357   \global\advance\colcount by 1  | 
         | 
  2358   \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}% | 
         | 
  2359   \setuptable  | 
         | 
  2360 }  | 
         | 
  2361   | 
         | 
  2362 \newcount\colcount  | 
         | 
  2363 \def\setuptable#1{% | 
         | 
  2364   \def\firstarg{#1}% | 
         | 
  2365   \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable  | 
         | 
  2366     \let\go = \relax  | 
         | 
  2367   \else  | 
         | 
  2368     \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions  | 
         | 
  2369       \global\setpercenttrue  | 
         | 
  2370     \else  | 
         | 
  2371       \ifsetpercent  | 
         | 
  2372          \let\go\pickupwholefraction  | 
         | 
  2373       \else  | 
         | 
  2374          \global\advance\colcount by 1  | 
         | 
  2375          \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a | 
         | 
  2376                    % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.  | 
         | 
  2377          \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% | 
         | 
  2378       \fi  | 
         | 
  2379     \fi  | 
         | 
  2380     \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction  | 
         | 
  2381       % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so  | 
         | 
  2382       % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.  | 
         | 
  2383       \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% | 
         | 
  2384     \else  | 
         | 
  2385       \let\go = \setuptable  | 
         | 
  2386     \fi%  | 
         | 
  2387   \fi  | 
         | 
  2388   \go  | 
         | 
  2389 }  | 
         | 
  2390   | 
         | 
  2391 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:  | 
         | 
  2392 %  | 
         | 
  2393 \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable} | 
         | 
  2394 \def\dotable#1{\bgroup | 
         | 
  2395   \vskip\parskip  | 
         | 
  2396   \let\item=\crcrwithfootnotes  | 
         | 
  2397   % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template  | 
         | 
  2398   % line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just & until  | 
         | 
  2399   % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.  --karl,  | 
         | 
  2400   % nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.  | 
         | 
  2401   \let\tab=&%  | 
         | 
  2402   \let\startfootins=\startsavedfootnote  | 
         | 
  2403   \tolerance=9500  | 
         | 
  2404   \hbadness=9500  | 
         | 
  2405   \setmultitablespacing  | 
         | 
  2406   \parskip=\multitableparskip  | 
         | 
  2407   \parindent=\multitableparindent  | 
         | 
  2408   \overfullrule=0pt  | 
         | 
  2409   \global\colcount=0  | 
         | 
  2410   \def\Emultitable{% | 
         | 
  2411     \global\setpercentfalse  | 
         | 
  2412     \crcrwithfootnotes\crcr  | 
         | 
  2413     \egroup\egroup  | 
         | 
  2414   }%  | 
         | 
  2415   %  | 
         | 
  2416   % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:  | 
         | 
  2417   \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable  | 
         | 
  2418   %  | 
         | 
  2419   % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of  | 
         | 
  2420   % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.  | 
         | 
  2421   % The table preamble  | 
         | 
  2422   % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.  | 
         | 
  2423   \everycr{\noalign{% | 
         | 
  2424   %  | 
         | 
  2425   % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.  | 
         | 
  2426   % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table  | 
         | 
  2427   % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem  | 
         | 
  2428   % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.  | 
         | 
  2429     \global\colcount=0\relax}}%  | 
         | 
  2430   %  | 
         | 
  2431   % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will  | 
         | 
  2432   % be used as many times as user calls for columns.  | 
         | 
  2433   % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and  | 
         | 
  2434   % continue for many paragraphs if desired.  | 
         | 
  2435   \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax  | 
         | 
  2436     \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname | 
         | 
  2437   %  | 
         | 
  2438   % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other  | 
         | 
  2439   % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after  | 
         | 
  2440   % the first one.  | 
         | 
  2441   %  | 
         | 
  2442   % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace  | 
         | 
  2443   % to the width of each template entry.  | 
         | 
  2444   %  | 
         | 
  2445   % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will  | 
         | 
  2446   % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip  | 
         | 
  2447   % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at  | 
         | 
  2448   % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.  | 
         | 
  2449   %  | 
         | 
  2450   % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.  | 
         | 
  2451   \rightskip=0pt  | 
         | 
  2452   \ifnum\colcount=1  | 
         | 
  2453     % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.  | 
         | 
  2454     \advance\hsize by\leftskip  | 
         | 
  2455   \else  | 
         | 
  2456     \ifsetpercent \else  | 
         | 
  2457       % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize  | 
         | 
  2458       % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.  | 
         | 
  2459       \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace  | 
         | 
  2460     \fi  | 
         | 
  2461    % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:  | 
         | 
  2462   \leftskip=\multitablecolspace  | 
         | 
  2463   \fi  | 
         | 
  2464   % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious  | 
         | 
  2465   % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the  | 
         | 
  2466   % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.  | 
         | 
  2467   % For example:  | 
         | 
  2468   % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89  | 
         | 
  2469   % @item @code{#} | 
         | 
  2470   % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.  | 
         | 
  2471   % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking  | 
         | 
  2472   % characters.  | 
         | 
  2473   \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr  | 
         | 
  2474 }  | 
         | 
  2475   | 
         | 
  2476 \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace. | 
         | 
  2477 % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on  | 
         | 
  2478 % current baselineskip.  | 
         | 
  2479 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt  | 
         | 
  2480 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip | 
         | 
  2481 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0  | 
         | 
  2482 %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,  | 
         | 
  2483 %% to keep lines equally spaced  | 
         | 
  2484 \let\multistrut = \strut  | 
         | 
  2485 \else  | 
         | 
  2486 %% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?  | 
         | 
  2487 \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0 | 
         | 
  2488 width0pt\relax} \fi  | 
         | 
  2489 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of  | 
         | 
  2490 %% table. If not, do nothing.  | 
         | 
  2491 %%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.  | 
         | 
  2492 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace  | 
         | 
  2493 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace  | 
         | 
  2494 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller  | 
         | 
  2495                                       %% than skip between lines in the table.  | 
         | 
  2496 \fi%  | 
         | 
  2497 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt  | 
         | 
  2498 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace  | 
         | 
  2499 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller  | 
         | 
  2500                                       %% than skip between lines in the table.  | 
         | 
  2501 \fi}  | 
         | 
  2502   | 
         | 
  2503 % In case a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote  | 
         | 
  2504 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is  | 
         | 
  2505 % finished.  Otherwise, the insertion is lost, it never migrates to the  | 
         | 
  2506 % main vertical list.  --kasal, 22jan03.  | 
         | 
  2507 %  | 
         | 
  2508 \newbox\savedfootnotes  | 
         | 
  2509 %  | 
         | 
  2510 % \dotable \let's \startfootins to this, so that \dofootnote will call  | 
         | 
  2511 % it instead of starting the insertion right away.  | 
         | 
  2512 \def\startsavedfootnote{% | 
         | 
  2513   \global\setbox\savedfootnotes = \vbox\bgroup  | 
         | 
  2514     \unvbox\savedfootnotes  | 
         | 
  2515 }  | 
         | 
  2516 \def\crcrwithfootnotes{% | 
         | 
  2517   \crcr  | 
         | 
  2518   \ifvoid\savedfootnotes \else  | 
         | 
  2519     \noalign{\insert\footins{\box\savedfootnotes}}% | 
         | 
  2520   \fi  | 
         | 
  2521 }  | 
         | 
  2522   | 
         | 
  2523 \message{conditionals,} | 
         | 
  2524 % Prevent errors for section commands.  | 
         | 
  2525 % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.  | 
         | 
  2526 \def\ignoresections{% | 
         | 
  2527   \let\appendix=\relax  | 
         | 
  2528   \let\appendixsec=\relax  | 
         | 
  2529   \let\appendixsection=\relax  | 
         | 
  2530   \let\appendixsubsec=\relax  | 
         | 
  2531   \let\appendixsubsection=\relax  | 
         | 
  2532   \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax  | 
         | 
  2533   \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax  | 
         | 
  2534   %\let\begin=\relax  | 
         | 
  2535   %\let\bye=\relax  | 
         | 
  2536   \let\centerchap=\relax  | 
         | 
  2537   \let\chapter=\relax  | 
         | 
  2538   \let\contents=\relax  | 
         | 
  2539   \let\section=\relax  | 
         | 
  2540   \let\smallbook=\relax  | 
         | 
  2541   \let\subsec=\relax  | 
         | 
  2542   \let\subsection=\relax  | 
         | 
  2543   \let\subsubsec=\relax  | 
         | 
  2544   \let\subsubsection=\relax  | 
         | 
  2545   \let\titlepage=\relax  | 
         | 
  2546   \let\top=\relax  | 
         | 
  2547   \let\unnumbered=\relax  | 
         | 
  2548   \let\unnumberedsec=\relax  | 
         | 
  2549   \let\unnumberedsection=\relax  | 
         | 
  2550   \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax  | 
         | 
  2551   \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax  | 
         | 
  2552   \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax  | 
         | 
  2553   \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax  | 
         | 
  2554 }  | 
         | 
  2555   | 
         | 
  2556 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.  | 
         | 
  2557 %  | 
         | 
  2558 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} | 
         | 
  2559 \def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription} | 
         | 
  2560 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} | 
         | 
  2561 \def\html{\doignore{html}} | 
         | 
  2562 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} | 
         | 
  2563 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} | 
         | 
  2564 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} | 
         | 
  2565 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} | 
         | 
  2566 \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} | 
         | 
  2567 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} | 
         | 
  2568 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} | 
         | 
  2569 \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} | 
         | 
  2570   | 
         | 
  2571 % @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file  | 
         | 
  2572 % which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.  | 
         | 
  2573 \let\dircategory = \comment  | 
         | 
  2574   | 
         | 
  2575 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.  | 
         | 
  2576 %  | 
         | 
  2577 % A count to remember the depth of nesting.  | 
         | 
  2578 \newcount\doignorecount  \doignorecount = 0  | 
         | 
  2579   | 
         | 
  2580 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup | 
         | 
  2581   % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.  | 
         | 
  2582   \ignoresections  | 
         | 
  2583   %  | 
         | 
  2584   % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.  | 
         | 
  2585   \catcode\spaceChar = 10  | 
         | 
  2586   %  | 
         | 
  2587   % Ignore braces, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.  | 
         | 
  2588   \catcode`\{ = 9 | 
         | 
  2589   \catcode`\} = 9  | 
         | 
  2590   %  | 
         | 
  2591   % Count number of #1's that we've seen.  | 
         | 
  2592   \doignorecount = 0  | 
         | 
  2593   %  | 
         | 
  2594   % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.  | 
         | 
  2595   \expandafter \dodoignore \csname#1\endcsname {#1}% | 
         | 
  2596 }  | 
         | 
  2597   | 
         | 
  2598 { \catcode`@=11 % We want to use \ST@P which cannot appear in texinfo source. | 
         | 
  2599   \obeylines %  | 
         | 
  2600   %  | 
         | 
  2601   \gdef\dodoignore#1#2{% | 
         | 
  2602     % #1 contains, e.g., \ifinfo, a.k.a. @ifinfo.  | 
         | 
  2603     % #2 contains the string `ifinfo'.  | 
         | 
  2604     %  | 
         | 
  2605     % Define a command to find the next `@end #2', which must be on a line  | 
         | 
  2606     % by itself.  | 
         | 
  2607     \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M\end #2{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M#1\ST@P}% | 
         | 
  2608     % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a  | 
         | 
  2609     % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for  | 
         | 
  2610     % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)  | 
         | 
  2611     \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M#1##2\ST@P{\doignoreyyy{##2}\ST@P}% | 
         | 
  2612     %  | 
         | 
  2613     % And now expand that command.  | 
         | 
  2614     \obeylines %  | 
         | 
  2615     \doignoretext ^^M%  | 
         | 
  2616   }%  | 
         | 
  2617 }  | 
         | 
  2618   | 
         | 
  2619 \def\doignoreyyy#1{% | 
         | 
  2620   \def\temp{#1}% | 
         | 
  2621   \ifx\temp\empty			% Nothing found.  | 
         | 
  2622     \let\next\doignoretextzzz  | 
         | 
  2623   \else					% Found a nested condition, ...  | 
         | 
  2624     \advance\doignorecount by 1  | 
         | 
  2625     \let\next\doignoretextyyy		% ..., look for another.  | 
         | 
  2626     % If we're here, #1 ends with \ifinfo (for example).  | 
         | 
  2627   \fi  | 
         | 
  2628   \next #1% the token \ST@P is present just after this macro.  | 
         | 
  2629 }  | 
         | 
  2630   | 
         | 
  2631 % We have to swallow the remaining "\ST@P".  | 
         | 
  2632 %   | 
         | 
  2633 \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% | 
         | 
  2634   \ifnum\doignorecount = 0	% We have just found the outermost @end.  | 
         | 
  2635     \let\next\enddoignore  | 
         | 
  2636   \else				% Still inside a nested condition.  | 
         | 
  2637     \advance\doignorecount by -1  | 
         | 
  2638     \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.  | 
         | 
  2639   \fi  | 
         | 
  2640   \next  | 
         | 
  2641 }  | 
         | 
  2642   | 
         | 
  2643 % Finish off ignored text.  | 
         | 
  2644 \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces} | 
         | 
  2645   | 
         | 
  2646   | 
         | 
  2647 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.  | 
         | 
  2648 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.  | 
         | 
  2649 %  | 
         | 
  2650 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be  | 
         | 
  2651 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our  | 
         | 
  2652 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we  | 
         | 
  2653 % didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid  | 
         | 
  2654 % losing inside @example, for instance.  | 
         | 
  2655 %  | 
         | 
  2656 \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10 | 
         | 
  2657   \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.  | 
         | 
  2658   \parsearg\setxxx}  | 
         | 
  2659 \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} | 
         | 
  2660 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% | 
         | 
  2661   \def\temp{#2}% | 
         | 
  2662   \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty  | 
         | 
  2663   \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. | 
         | 
  2664   \fi  | 
         | 
  2665   \endgroup  | 
         | 
  2666 }  | 
         | 
  2667 % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or  | 
         | 
  2668 % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into  | 
         | 
  2669 % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'. | 
         | 
  2670 \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}} | 
         | 
  2671   | 
         | 
  2672 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.  | 
         | 
  2673 %  | 
         | 
  2674 \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx} | 
         | 
  2675 \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax} | 
         | 
  2676   | 
         | 
  2677 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. | 
         | 
  2678 { | 
         | 
  2679   \catcode`\_ = \active  | 
         | 
  2680   %  | 
         | 
  2681   % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if  | 
         | 
  2682   % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any | 
         | 
  2683   % such active characters to their normal equivalents.  | 
         | 
  2684   \gdef\value{\begingroup | 
         | 
  2685     \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other  | 
         | 
  2686     \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore  | 
         | 
  2687     \valuexxx}  | 
         | 
  2688 }  | 
         | 
  2689 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} | 
         | 
  2690   | 
         | 
  2691 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's  | 
         | 
  2692 % properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones  | 
         | 
  2693 % whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything  | 
         | 
  2694 % about that.  The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable  | 
         | 
  2695 % is set), since the result winds up in the index file.  This means that  | 
         | 
  2696 % if the variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost  | 
         | 
  2697 % certain it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with  | 
         | 
  2698 % sufficient work to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of  | 
         | 
  2699 % complete).  | 
         | 
  2700 %  | 
         | 
  2701 \def\expandablevalue#1{% | 
         | 
  2702   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax  | 
         | 
  2703     {[No value for ``#1'']}% | 
         | 
  2704     \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% | 
         | 
  2705   \else  | 
         | 
  2706     \csname SET#1\endcsname  | 
         | 
  2707   \fi  | 
         | 
  2708 }  | 
         | 
  2709   | 
         | 
  2710 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined  | 
         | 
  2711 % with @set.  | 
         | 
  2712 %  | 
         | 
  2713 \def\ifset{\parsearg\doifset} | 
         | 
  2714 \def\doifset#1{% | 
         | 
  2715   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax  | 
         | 
  2716     \let\next=\ifsetfail  | 
         | 
  2717   \else  | 
         | 
  2718     \let\next=\ifsetsucceed  | 
         | 
  2719   \fi  | 
         | 
  2720   \next  | 
         | 
  2721 }  | 
         | 
  2722 \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}} | 
         | 
  2723 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} | 
         | 
  2724 \defineunmatchedend{ifset} | 
         | 
  2725   | 
         | 
  2726 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been  | 
         | 
  2727 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.  | 
         | 
  2728 %  | 
         | 
  2729 \def\ifclear{\parsearg\doifclear} | 
         | 
  2730 \def\doifclear#1{% | 
         | 
  2731   \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax  | 
         | 
  2732     \let\next=\ifclearsucceed  | 
         | 
  2733   \else  | 
         | 
  2734     \let\next=\ifclearfail  | 
         | 
  2735   \fi  | 
         | 
  2736   \next  | 
         | 
  2737 }  | 
         | 
  2738 \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}} | 
         | 
  2739 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} | 
         | 
  2740 \defineunmatchedend{ifclear} | 
         | 
  2741   | 
         | 
  2742 % @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we  | 
         | 
  2743 % read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make  | 
         | 
  2744 % `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.  | 
         | 
  2745 %  | 
         | 
  2746 \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}} | 
         | 
  2747 \def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}} | 
         | 
  2748 \def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}} | 
         | 
  2749 \def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}} | 
         | 
  2750 \defineunmatchedend{iftex} | 
         | 
  2751 \defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml} | 
         | 
  2752 \defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo} | 
         | 
  2753 \defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext} | 
         | 
  2754   | 
         | 
  2755 % True conditional.  Since \set globally defines its variables, we can  | 
         | 
  2756 % just start and end a group (to keep the @end definition undefined at  | 
         | 
  2757 % the outer level).  | 
         | 
  2758 %  | 
         | 
  2759 \def\conditionalsucceed#1{\begingroup | 
         | 
  2760   \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\endgroup}% | 
         | 
  2761 }  | 
         | 
  2762   | 
         | 
  2763 % @defininfoenclose.  | 
         | 
  2764 \let\definfoenclose=\comment  | 
         | 
  2765   | 
         | 
  2766   | 
         | 
  2767 \message{indexing,} | 
         | 
  2768 % Index generation facilities  | 
         | 
  2769   | 
         | 
  2770 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite  | 
         | 
  2771 % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.  | 
         | 
  2772 {\catcode`\@=11 | 
         | 
  2773 \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}} | 
         | 
  2774   | 
         | 
  2775 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. | 
         | 
  2776 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that  | 
         | 
  2777 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.  | 
         | 
  2778 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for  | 
         | 
  2779 % the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.  | 
         | 
  2780 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long  | 
         | 
  2781 % for the sake of vms.  | 
         | 
  2782 %  | 
         | 
  2783 \def\newindex#1{% | 
         | 
  2784   \iflinks  | 
         | 
  2785     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname  | 
         | 
  2786     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file  | 
         | 
  2787   \fi  | 
         | 
  2788   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index | 
         | 
  2789     \noexpand\doindex{#1}} | 
         | 
  2790 }  | 
         | 
  2791   | 
         | 
  2792 % @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo} | 
         | 
  2793 %  | 
         | 
  2794 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} | 
         | 
  2795   | 
         | 
  2796 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.  | 
         | 
  2797 %  | 
         | 
  2798 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} | 
         | 
  2799 %  | 
         | 
  2800 \def\newcodeindex#1{% | 
         | 
  2801   \iflinks  | 
         | 
  2802     \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname  | 
         | 
  2803     \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1  | 
         | 
  2804   \fi  | 
         | 
  2805   \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% | 
         | 
  2806     \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% | 
         | 
  2807 }  | 
         | 
  2808   | 
         | 
  2809   | 
         | 
  2810 % @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.  | 
         | 
  2811 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.  | 
         | 
  2812 %  | 
         | 
  2813 % @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo  | 
         | 
  2814 % inside @code.  | 
         | 
  2815 %  | 
         | 
  2816 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} | 
         | 
  2817 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} | 
         | 
  2818   | 
         | 
  2819 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),  | 
         | 
  2820 % #3 the target index (bar).  | 
         | 
  2821 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  2822   % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up  | 
         | 
  2823   % closing the target index.  | 
         | 
  2824   \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined  | 
         | 
  2825     % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the  | 
         | 
  2826     % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.  | 
         | 
  2827     \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname  | 
         | 
  2828     \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1  | 
         | 
  2829   \fi  | 
         | 
  2830   % redefine \fooindfile:  | 
         | 
  2831   \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname  | 
         | 
  2832   \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp  | 
         | 
  2833   % redefine \fooindex:  | 
         | 
  2834   \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% | 
         | 
  2835 }  | 
         | 
  2836   | 
         | 
  2837 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.  | 
         | 
  2838 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,  | 
         | 
  2839 %  and it is "foo", the name of the index.  | 
         | 
  2840   | 
         | 
  2841 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.  | 
         | 
  2842 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.  | 
         | 
  2843   | 
         | 
  2844 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} | 
         | 
  2845 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.  | 
         | 
  2846   | 
         | 
  2847 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} | 
         | 
  2848 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} | 
         | 
  2849   | 
         | 
  2850 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.  | 
         | 
  2851 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} | 
         | 
  2852 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} | 
         | 
  2853   | 
         | 
  2854 % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.  | 
         | 
  2855 % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,  | 
         | 
  2856 % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.  | 
         | 
  2857 %  | 
         | 
  2858 \def\indexdummies{% | 
         | 
  2859   \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. | 
         | 
  2860   \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% | 
         | 
  2861   % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. | 
         | 
  2862   % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes  | 
         | 
  2863   % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.  | 
         | 
  2864   \let\{ = \mylbrace | 
         | 
  2865   \let\} = \myrbrace  | 
         | 
  2866   %  | 
         | 
  2867   % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus  | 
         | 
  2868   % effectively preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control  | 
         | 
  2869   % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect  | 
         | 
  2870   % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word  | 
         | 
  2871   % from whatever follows.  | 
         | 
  2872   %  | 
         | 
  2873   % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the  | 
         | 
  2874   % space.  | 
         | 
  2875   %  | 
         | 
  2876   % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and  | 
         | 
  2877   % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then | 
         | 
  2878   % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).  | 
         | 
  2879   %  | 
         | 
  2880   \def\definedummyword##1{% | 
         | 
  2881     \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}% | 
         | 
  2882   }%  | 
         | 
  2883   \def\definedummyletter##1{% | 
         | 
  2884     \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}% | 
         | 
  2885   }%  | 
         | 
  2886   %  | 
         | 
  2887   % Do the redefinitions.  | 
         | 
  2888   \commondummies  | 
         | 
  2889 }  | 
         | 
  2890   | 
         | 
  2891 % For the aux file, @ is the escape character.  So we want to redefine  | 
         | 
  2892 % everything using @ instead of \realbackslash.  When everything uses  | 
         | 
  2893 % @, this will be simpler.  | 
         | 
  2894 %  | 
         | 
  2895 \def\atdummies{% | 
         | 
  2896   \def\@{@@}% | 
         | 
  2897   \def\ {@ }% | 
         | 
  2898   \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd | 
         | 
  2899   \let\} = \rbraceatcmd  | 
         | 
  2900   %  | 
         | 
  2901   % (See comments in \indexdummies.)  | 
         | 
  2902   \def\definedummyword##1{% | 
         | 
  2903     \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}% | 
         | 
  2904   }%  | 
         | 
  2905   \def\definedummyletter##1{% | 
         | 
  2906     \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}% | 
         | 
  2907   }%  | 
         | 
  2908   %  | 
         | 
  2909   % Do the redefinitions.  | 
         | 
  2910   \commondummies  | 
         | 
  2911 }  | 
         | 
  2912   | 
         | 
  2913 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.  \definedummyword and  | 
         | 
  2914 % \definedummyletter must be defined first.  | 
         | 
  2915 %  | 
         | 
  2916 \def\commondummies{% | 
         | 
  2917   %  | 
         | 
  2918   \normalturnoffactive  | 
         | 
  2919   %  | 
         | 
  2920   % Control letters and accents.  | 
         | 
  2921   \definedummyletter{_}% | 
         | 
  2922   \definedummyletter{,}% | 
         | 
  2923   \definedummyletter{"}% | 
         | 
  2924   \definedummyletter{`}% | 
         | 
  2925   \definedummyletter{'}% | 
         | 
  2926   \definedummyletter{^}% | 
         | 
  2927   \definedummyletter{~}% | 
         | 
  2928   \definedummyletter{=}% | 
         | 
  2929   \definedummyword{u}% | 
         | 
  2930   \definedummyword{v}% | 
         | 
  2931   \definedummyword{H}% | 
         | 
  2932   \definedummyword{dotaccent}% | 
         | 
  2933   \definedummyword{ringaccent}% | 
         | 
  2934   \definedummyword{tieaccent}% | 
         | 
  2935   \definedummyword{ubaraccent}% | 
         | 
  2936   \definedummyword{udotaccent}% | 
         | 
  2937   \definedummyword{dotless}% | 
         | 
  2938   %  | 
         | 
  2939   % Other non-English letters.  | 
         | 
  2940   \definedummyword{AA}% | 
         | 
  2941   \definedummyword{AE}% | 
         | 
  2942   \definedummyword{L}% | 
         | 
  2943   \definedummyword{OE}% | 
         | 
  2944   \definedummyword{O}% | 
         | 
  2945   \definedummyword{aa}% | 
         | 
  2946   \definedummyword{ae}% | 
         | 
  2947   \definedummyword{l}% | 
         | 
  2948   \definedummyword{oe}% | 
         | 
  2949   \definedummyword{o}% | 
         | 
  2950   \definedummyword{ss}% | 
         | 
  2951   %  | 
         | 
  2952   % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.  | 
         | 
  2953   \definedummyword{bf}% | 
         | 
  2954   \definedummyword{gtr}% | 
         | 
  2955   \definedummyword{hat}% | 
         | 
  2956   \definedummyword{less}% | 
         | 
  2957   \definedummyword{sf}% | 
         | 
  2958   \definedummyword{sl}% | 
         | 
  2959   \definedummyword{tclose}% | 
         | 
  2960   \definedummyword{tt}% | 
         | 
  2961   %  | 
         | 
  2962   % Texinfo font commands.  | 
         | 
  2963   \definedummyword{b}% | 
         | 
  2964   \definedummyword{i}% | 
         | 
  2965   \definedummyword{r}% | 
         | 
  2966   \definedummyword{sc}% | 
         | 
  2967   \definedummyword{t}% | 
         | 
  2968   %  | 
         | 
  2969   \definedummyword{TeX}% | 
         | 
  2970   \definedummyword{acronym}% | 
         | 
  2971   \definedummyword{cite}% | 
         | 
  2972   \definedummyword{code}% | 
         | 
  2973   \definedummyword{command}% | 
         | 
  2974   \definedummyword{dfn}% | 
         | 
  2975   \definedummyword{dots}% | 
         | 
  2976   \definedummyword{emph}% | 
         | 
  2977   \definedummyword{env}% | 
         | 
  2978   \definedummyword{file}% | 
         | 
  2979   \definedummyword{kbd}% | 
         | 
  2980   \definedummyword{key}% | 
         | 
  2981   \definedummyword{math}% | 
         | 
  2982   \definedummyword{option}% | 
         | 
  2983   \definedummyword{samp}% | 
         | 
  2984   \definedummyword{strong}% | 
         | 
  2985   \definedummyword{uref}% | 
         | 
  2986   \definedummyword{url}% | 
         | 
  2987   \definedummyword{var}% | 
         | 
  2988   \definedummyword{w}% | 
         | 
  2989   %  | 
         | 
  2990   % Assorted special characters.  | 
         | 
  2991   \definedummyword{bullet}% | 
         | 
  2992   \definedummyword{copyright}% | 
         | 
  2993   \definedummyword{dots}% | 
         | 
  2994   \definedummyword{enddots}% | 
         | 
  2995   \definedummyword{equiv}% | 
         | 
  2996   \definedummyword{error}% | 
         | 
  2997   \definedummyword{expansion}% | 
         | 
  2998   \definedummyword{minus}% | 
         | 
  2999   \definedummyword{pounds}% | 
         | 
  3000   \definedummyword{point}% | 
         | 
  3001   \definedummyword{print}% | 
         | 
  3002   \definedummyword{result}% | 
         | 
  3003   %  | 
         | 
  3004   % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not  | 
         | 
  3005   % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any  | 
         | 
  3006   % (non-fully-expandable) commands.  | 
         | 
  3007   \let\value = \expandablevalue  | 
         | 
  3008   %  | 
         | 
  3009   % Normal spaces, not active ones.  | 
         | 
  3010   \unsepspaces  | 
         | 
  3011   %  | 
         | 
  3012   % No macro expansion.  | 
         | 
  3013   \turnoffmacros  | 
         | 
  3014 }  | 
         | 
  3015   | 
         | 
  3016 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces  | 
         | 
  3017 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the  | 
         | 
  3018 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).  | 
         | 
  3019 {\obeyspaces | 
         | 
  3020  \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}} | 
         | 
  3021   | 
         | 
  3022   | 
         | 
  3023 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index  | 
         | 
  3024 % by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all  | 
         | 
  3025 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string  | 
         | 
  3026 % would be for a given command (usually its argument).  | 
         | 
  3027 %  | 
         | 
  3028 \def\indexdummytex{TeX} | 
         | 
  3029 \def\indexdummydots{...} | 
         | 
  3030 %  | 
         | 
  3031 \def\indexnofonts{% | 
         | 
  3032   \def\ { }% | 
         | 
  3033   \def\@{@}% | 
         | 
  3034   % how to handle braces?  | 
         | 
  3035   \def\_{\normalunderscore}% | 
         | 
  3036   %  | 
         | 
  3037   \let\,=\asis  | 
         | 
  3038   \let\"=\asis  | 
         | 
  3039   \let\`=\asis  | 
         | 
  3040   \let\'=\asis  | 
         | 
  3041   \let\^=\asis  | 
         | 
  3042   \let\~=\asis  | 
         | 
  3043   \let\==\asis  | 
         | 
  3044   \let\u=\asis  | 
         | 
  3045   \let\v=\asis  | 
         | 
  3046   \let\H=\asis  | 
         | 
  3047   \let\dotaccent=\asis  | 
         | 
  3048   \let\ringaccent=\asis  | 
         | 
  3049   \let\tieaccent=\asis  | 
         | 
  3050   \let\ubaraccent=\asis  | 
         | 
  3051   \let\udotaccent=\asis  | 
         | 
  3052   \let\dotless=\asis  | 
         | 
  3053   %  | 
         | 
  3054   % Other non-English letters.  | 
         | 
  3055   \def\AA{AA}% | 
         | 
  3056   \def\AE{AE}% | 
         | 
  3057   \def\L{L}% | 
         | 
  3058   \def\OE{OE}% | 
         | 
  3059   \def\O{O}% | 
         | 
  3060   \def\aa{aa}% | 
         | 
  3061   \def\ae{ae}% | 
         | 
  3062   \def\l{l}% | 
         | 
  3063   \def\oe{oe}% | 
         | 
  3064   \def\o{o}% | 
         | 
  3065   \def\ss{ss}% | 
         | 
  3066   \def\exclamdown{!}% | 
         | 
  3067   \def\questiondown{?}% | 
         | 
  3068   %  | 
         | 
  3069   % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command  | 
         | 
  3070   % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.  | 
         | 
  3071   % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.  | 
         | 
  3072   %\let\tt=\asis  | 
         | 
  3073   %  | 
         | 
  3074   % Texinfo font commands.  | 
         | 
  3075   \let\b=\asis  | 
         | 
  3076   \let\i=\asis  | 
         | 
  3077   \let\r=\asis  | 
         | 
  3078   \let\sc=\asis  | 
         | 
  3079   \let\t=\asis  | 
         | 
  3080   %  | 
         | 
  3081   \let\TeX=\indexdummytex  | 
         | 
  3082   \let\acronym=\asis  | 
         | 
  3083   \let\cite=\asis  | 
         | 
  3084   \let\code=\asis  | 
         | 
  3085   \let\command=\asis  | 
         | 
  3086   \let\dfn=\asis  | 
         | 
  3087   \let\dots=\indexdummydots  | 
         | 
  3088   \let\emph=\asis  | 
         | 
  3089   \let\env=\asis  | 
         | 
  3090   \let\file=\asis  | 
         | 
  3091   \let\kbd=\asis  | 
         | 
  3092   \let\key=\asis  | 
         | 
  3093   \let\math=\asis  | 
         | 
  3094   \let\option=\asis  | 
         | 
  3095   \let\samp=\asis  | 
         | 
  3096   \let\strong=\asis  | 
         | 
  3097   \let\uref=\asis  | 
         | 
  3098   \let\url=\asis  | 
         | 
  3099   \let\var=\asis  | 
         | 
  3100   \let\w=\asis  | 
         | 
  3101 }  | 
         | 
  3102   | 
         | 
  3103 \let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.  | 
         | 
  3104 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?  | 
         | 
  3105   | 
         | 
  3106 % For \ifx comparisons.  | 
         | 
  3107 \def\emptymacro{\empty} | 
         | 
  3108   | 
         | 
  3109 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.  | 
         | 
  3110 %  | 
         | 
  3111 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty} | 
         | 
  3112   | 
         | 
  3113 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.  | 
         | 
  3114 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --  | 
         | 
  3115 % \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception  | 
         | 
  3116 % is with defuns, which call us directly.  | 
         | 
  3117 %  | 
         | 
  3118 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  3119   % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.  | 
         | 
  3120   \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else  | 
         | 
  3121     \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}% | 
         | 
  3122   \fi  | 
         | 
  3123   {% | 
         | 
  3124     \count255=\lastpenalty  | 
         | 
  3125     {% | 
         | 
  3126       \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage  | 
         | 
  3127       \escapechar=`\\  | 
         | 
  3128       {% | 
         | 
  3129         \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.  | 
         | 
  3130         \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now | 
         | 
  3131         % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.  | 
         | 
  3132         %  | 
         | 
  3133         % The main index entry text.  | 
         | 
  3134         \toks0 = {#2}% | 
         | 
  3135         %  | 
         | 
  3136         % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.  | 
         | 
  3137         \def\thirdarg{#3}% | 
         | 
  3138         \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else  | 
         | 
  3139            % If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index  | 
         | 
  3140            % line to write.  | 
         | 
  3141           \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% | 
         | 
  3142         \fi  | 
         | 
  3143         %  | 
         | 
  3144         % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to  | 
         | 
  3145         % get the string to sort by.  | 
         | 
  3146         {\indexnofonts | 
         | 
  3147          \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion | 
         | 
  3148          \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% | 
         | 
  3149         }%  | 
         | 
  3150         %  | 
         | 
  3151         % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and  | 
         | 
  3152         % the original text, including any font commands.  We write  | 
         | 
  3153         % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the  | 
         | 
  3154         % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s  | 
         | 
  3155         % sorted result.  | 
         | 
  3156         \edef\temp{% | 
         | 
  3157           \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{% | 
         | 
  3158             \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}% | 
         | 
  3159         }%  | 
         | 
  3160         %  | 
         | 
  3161         % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it  | 
         | 
  3162         % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting  | 
         | 
  3163         % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the  | 
         | 
  3164         % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences  | 
         | 
  3165         % like this:  | 
         | 
  3166         % @end defun  | 
         | 
  3167         % @tindex whatever  | 
         | 
  3168         % @defun ...  | 
         | 
  3169         % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the  | 
         | 
  3170         % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of  | 
         | 
  3171         % the previous defun.  | 
         | 
  3172         %  | 
         | 
  3173         % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We  | 
         | 
  3174         % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.  | 
         | 
  3175         %  | 
         | 
  3176         % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.  | 
         | 
  3177         %  | 
         | 
  3178         \iflinks  | 
         | 
  3179           \ifvmode  | 
         | 
  3180             \skip0 = \lastskip  | 
         | 
  3181             \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\skip0 \fi  | 
         | 
  3182           \fi  | 
         | 
  3183           %  | 
         | 
  3184           \temp % do the write  | 
         | 
  3185           %  | 
         | 
  3186           \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi  | 
         | 
  3187         \fi  | 
         | 
  3188       }%  | 
         | 
  3189     }%  | 
         | 
  3190     \penalty\count255  | 
         | 
  3191   }%  | 
         | 
  3192 }  | 
         | 
  3193   | 
         | 
  3194 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like  | 
         | 
  3195 %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} | 
         | 
  3196 % or  | 
         | 
  3197 %  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} | 
         | 
  3198 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files  | 
         | 
  3199 % containing these kinds of lines:  | 
         | 
  3200 %  \initial {c} | 
         | 
  3201 %     before the first topic whose initial is c  | 
         | 
  3202 %  \entry {topic}{pagelist} | 
         | 
  3203 %     for a topic that is used without subtopics  | 
         | 
  3204 %  \primary {topic} | 
         | 
  3205 %     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics  | 
         | 
  3206 %  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} | 
         | 
  3207 %     for each subtopic.  | 
         | 
  3208   | 
         | 
  3209 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands  | 
         | 
  3210 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.  | 
         | 
  3211   | 
         | 
  3212 \def\findex {\fnindex} | 
         | 
  3213 \def\kindex {\kyindex} | 
         | 
  3214 \def\cindex {\cpindex} | 
         | 
  3215 \def\vindex {\vrindex} | 
         | 
  3216 \def\tindex {\tpindex} | 
         | 
  3217 \def\pindex {\pgindex} | 
         | 
  3218   | 
         | 
  3219 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} | 
         | 
  3220 {\obeylines % | 
         | 
  3221 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % | 
         | 
  3222 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} | 
         | 
  3223   | 
         | 
  3224 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.  | 
         | 
  3225   | 
         | 
  3226 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.  | 
         | 
  3227 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).  | 
         | 
  3228 %  | 
         | 
  3229 \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex} | 
         | 
  3230 \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup | 
         | 
  3231   \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% | 
         | 
  3232   %  | 
         | 
  3233   \smallfonts \rm  | 
         | 
  3234   \tolerance = 9500  | 
         | 
  3235   \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. | 
         | 
  3236   \indexbreaks  | 
         | 
  3237   %  | 
         | 
  3238   % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.  | 
         | 
  3239   % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains  | 
         | 
  3240   % \initial {@} | 
         | 
  3241   % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces  | 
         | 
  3242   % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).  | 
         | 
  3243   \catcode`\@ = 11  | 
         | 
  3244   \openin 1 \jobname.#1s  | 
         | 
  3245   \ifeof 1  | 
         | 
  3246     % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,  | 
         | 
  3247     % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the  | 
         | 
  3248     % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure  | 
         | 
  3249     % there is some text.  | 
         | 
  3250     \putwordIndexNonexistent  | 
         | 
  3251   \else  | 
         | 
  3252     %  | 
         | 
  3253     % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof  | 
         | 
  3254     % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so  | 
         | 
  3255     % it can discover if there is anything in it.  | 
         | 
  3256     \read 1 to \temp  | 
         | 
  3257     \ifeof 1  | 
         | 
  3258       \putwordIndexIsEmpty  | 
         | 
  3259     \else  | 
         | 
  3260       % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape  | 
         | 
  3261       % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change  | 
         | 
  3262       % to make right now.  | 
         | 
  3263       \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}% | 
         | 
  3264       \catcode`\\ = 0  | 
         | 
  3265       \escapechar = `\\  | 
         | 
  3266       \begindoublecolumns  | 
         | 
  3267       \input \jobname.#1s  | 
         | 
  3268       \enddoublecolumns  | 
         | 
  3269     \fi  | 
         | 
  3270   \fi  | 
         | 
  3271   \closein 1  | 
         | 
  3272 \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  3273   | 
         | 
  3274 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.  | 
         | 
  3275 % Change them to control the appearance of the index.  | 
         | 
  3276   | 
         | 
  3277 \def\initial#1{{% | 
         | 
  3278   % Some minor font changes for the special characters.  | 
         | 
  3279   \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt  | 
         | 
  3280   %  | 
         | 
  3281   % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.  | 
         | 
  3282   \removelastskip  | 
         | 
  3283   %  | 
         | 
  3284   % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.  | 
         | 
  3285   \penalty -300  | 
         | 
  3286   %  | 
         | 
  3287   % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of  | 
         | 
  3288   % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column  | 
         | 
  3289   % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch  | 
         | 
  3290   % we need before each entry, but it's better.  | 
         | 
  3291   %  | 
         | 
  3292   % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.  | 
         | 
  3293   \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip  | 
         | 
  3294   \leftline{\secbf #1}% | 
         | 
  3295   \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip  | 
         | 
  3296   %  | 
         | 
  3297   % Do our best not to break after the initial.  | 
         | 
  3298   \nobreak  | 
         | 
  3299 }}  | 
         | 
  3300   | 
         | 
  3301 % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2  | 
         | 
  3302 % flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents  | 
         | 
  3303 % entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.  | 
         | 
  3304 %  | 
         | 
  3305 \def\entry#1#2{\begingroup | 
         | 
  3306   %  | 
         | 
  3307   % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't  | 
         | 
  3308   % affect previous text.  | 
         | 
  3309   \par  | 
         | 
  3310   %  | 
         | 
  3311   % Do not fill out the last line with white space.  | 
         | 
  3312   \parfillskip = 0in  | 
         | 
  3313   %  | 
         | 
  3314   % No extra space above this paragraph.  | 
         | 
  3315   \parskip = 0in  | 
         | 
  3316   %  | 
         | 
  3317   % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.  | 
         | 
  3318   \finalhyphendemerits = 0  | 
         | 
  3319   %  | 
         | 
  3320   % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number  | 
         | 
  3321   % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the  | 
         | 
  3322   % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large  | 
         | 
  3323   % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across  | 
         | 
  3324   % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.  | 
         | 
  3325   %  | 
         | 
  3326   % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start  | 
         | 
  3327   % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.  | 
         | 
  3328   \hangindent = 2em  | 
         | 
  3329   %  | 
         | 
  3330   % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line  | 
         | 
  3331   % with blank space.  | 
         | 
  3332   \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil  | 
         | 
  3333   %  | 
         | 
  3334   % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.  | 
         | 
  3335   \vskip 0pt plus1pt  | 
         | 
  3336   %  | 
         | 
  3337   % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking  | 
         | 
  3338   % parameters we've set above will have an effect.  | 
         | 
  3339   \noindent  | 
         | 
  3340   %  | 
         | 
  3341   % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.  | 
         | 
  3342   #1%  | 
         | 
  3343   % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if  | 
         | 
  3344   % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be  | 
         | 
  3345   % cursed by a Unix daemon.  | 
         | 
  3346   \def\tempa{{\rm }}% | 
         | 
  3347   \def\tempb{#2}% | 
         | 
  3348   \edef\tempc{\tempa}% | 
         | 
  3349   \edef\tempd{\tempb}% | 
         | 
  3350   \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%  | 
         | 
  3351     %  | 
         | 
  3352     % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out  | 
         | 
  3353     % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the  | 
         | 
  3354     % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)  | 
         | 
  3355     \hfil\penalty50  | 
         | 
  3356     \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.  | 
         | 
  3357     %  | 
         | 
  3358     % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as  | 
         | 
  3359     % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull  | 
         | 
  3360     % \hbox ensues.  | 
         | 
  3361     \ifpdf  | 
         | 
  3362       \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.  | 
         | 
  3363     \else  | 
         | 
  3364       \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.  | 
         | 
  3365     \fi  | 
         | 
  3366   \fi%  | 
         | 
  3367   \par  | 
         | 
  3368 \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  3369   | 
         | 
  3370 % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.  | 
         | 
  3371 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders | 
         | 
  3372   \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} | 
         | 
  3373   | 
         | 
  3374 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} | 
         | 
  3375   | 
         | 
  3376 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm  | 
         | 
  3377 \def\secondary#1#2{{% | 
         | 
  3378   \parfillskip=0in  | 
         | 
  3379   \parskip=0in  | 
         | 
  3380   \hangindent=1in  | 
         | 
  3381   \hangafter=1  | 
         | 
  3382   \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill | 
         | 
  3383   \ifpdf  | 
         | 
  3384     \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.  | 
         | 
  3385   \else  | 
         | 
  3386     #2  | 
         | 
  3387   \fi  | 
         | 
  3388   \par  | 
         | 
  3389 }}  | 
         | 
  3390   | 
         | 
  3391 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.  | 
         | 
  3392 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,  | 
         | 
  3393 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.  | 
         | 
  3394 \catcode`\@=11  | 
         | 
  3395   | 
         | 
  3396 \newbox\partialpage  | 
         | 
  3397 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize  | 
         | 
  3398   | 
         | 
  3399 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns | 
         | 
  3400   % Grab any single-column material above us.  | 
         | 
  3401   \output = {% | 
         | 
  3402     %  | 
         | 
  3403     % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a  | 
         | 
  3404     % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output  | 
         | 
  3405     % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is  | 
         | 
  3406     % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In  | 
         | 
  3407     % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal  | 
         | 
  3408     % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this  | 
         | 
  3409     % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.  | 
         | 
  3410     \ifvoid\partialpage \else  | 
         | 
  3411       \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% | 
         | 
  3412     \fi  | 
         | 
  3413     %  | 
         | 
  3414     \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% | 
         | 
  3415       % Unvbox the main output page.  | 
         | 
  3416       \unvbox\PAGE  | 
         | 
  3417       \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip  | 
         | 
  3418     }%  | 
         | 
  3419   }%  | 
         | 
  3420   \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage  | 
         | 
  3421   %  | 
         | 
  3422   % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.  | 
         | 
  3423   \output = {\doublecolumnout}% | 
         | 
  3424   %  | 
         | 
  3425   % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this  | 
         | 
  3426   % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11  | 
         | 
  3427   % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple  | 
         | 
  3428   % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the  | 
         | 
  3429   % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.  | 
         | 
  3430   %  | 
         | 
  3431   % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between  | 
         | 
  3432   % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it  | 
         | 
  3433   % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant  | 
         | 
  3434   % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)  | 
         | 
  3435   % as it did when we hard-coded it.  | 
         | 
  3436   %  | 
         | 
  3437   % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we  | 
         | 
  3438   % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)  | 
         | 
  3439   % been clobbered.  | 
         | 
  3440   %  | 
         | 
  3441   \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize  | 
         | 
  3442     \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize  | 
         | 
  3443     \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2  | 
         | 
  3444   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize  | 
         | 
  3445   %  | 
         | 
  3446   % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,  | 
         | 
  3447   % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)  | 
         | 
  3448   \vsize = 2\vsize  | 
         | 
  3449 }  | 
         | 
  3450   | 
         | 
  3451 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except  | 
         | 
  3452 % the last.  | 
         | 
  3453 %  | 
         | 
  3454 \def\doublecolumnout{% | 
         | 
  3455   \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth  | 
         | 
  3456   % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal  | 
         | 
  3457   % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the  | 
         | 
  3458   % previous page.  | 
         | 
  3459   \dimen@ = \vsize  | 
         | 
  3460   \divide\dimen@ by 2  | 
         | 
  3461   \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage  | 
         | 
  3462   %  | 
         | 
  3463   % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.  | 
         | 
  3464   \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@  | 
         | 
  3465   \onepageout\pagesofar  | 
         | 
  3466   \unvbox255  | 
         | 
  3467   \penalty\outputpenalty  | 
         | 
  3468 }  | 
         | 
  3469 %  | 
         | 
  3470 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,  | 
         | 
  3471 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.  | 
         | 
  3472 \def\pagesofar{% | 
         | 
  3473   \unvbox\partialpage  | 
         | 
  3474   %  | 
         | 
  3475   \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize  | 
         | 
  3476   \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize  | 
         | 
  3477   \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% | 
         | 
  3478 }  | 
         | 
  3479 %  | 
         | 
  3480 % All done with double columns.  | 
         | 
  3481 \def\enddoublecolumns{% | 
         | 
  3482   \output = {% | 
         | 
  3483     % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the  | 
         | 
  3484     % current page, no automatic page break.  | 
         | 
  3485     \balancecolumns  | 
         | 
  3486     %  | 
         | 
  3487     % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,  | 
         | 
  3488     % though, there will be another page break right after this \output  | 
         | 
  3489     % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not  | 
         | 
  3490     % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal  | 
         | 
  3491     % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be  | 
         | 
  3492     % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes  | 
         | 
  3493     % the output somewhat more palatable.)  | 
         | 
  3494     \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% | 
         | 
  3495   }%  | 
         | 
  3496   \eject  | 
         | 
  3497   \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns  | 
         | 
  3498   %  | 
         | 
  3499   % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted  | 
         | 
  3500   % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column  | 
         | 
  3501   % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the  | 
         | 
  3502   % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).  | 
         | 
  3503   \pagegoal = \vsize  | 
         | 
  3504 }  | 
         | 
  3505 %  | 
         | 
  3506 % Called at the end of the double column material.  | 
         | 
  3507 \def\balancecolumns{% | 
         | 
  3508   \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. | 
         | 
  3509   \dimen@ = \ht0  | 
         | 
  3510   \advance\dimen@ by \topskip  | 
         | 
  3511   \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip  | 
         | 
  3512   \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to  | 
         | 
  3513   %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% | 
         | 
  3514   \splittopskip = \topskip  | 
         | 
  3515   % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.  | 
         | 
  3516   {% | 
         | 
  3517     \vbadness = 10000  | 
         | 
  3518     \loop  | 
         | 
  3519       \global\setbox3 = \copy0  | 
         | 
  3520       \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@  | 
         | 
  3521     \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@  | 
         | 
  3522       \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt  | 
         | 
  3523     \repeat  | 
         | 
  3524   }%  | 
         | 
  3525   %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% | 
         | 
  3526   \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% | 
         | 
  3527   \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% | 
         | 
  3528   %  | 
         | 
  3529   \pagesofar  | 
         | 
  3530 }  | 
         | 
  3531 \catcode`\@ = \other  | 
         | 
  3532   | 
         | 
  3533   | 
         | 
  3534 \message{sectioning,} | 
         | 
  3535 % Chapters, sections, etc.  | 
         | 
  3536   | 
         | 
  3537 \newcount\chapno  | 
         | 
  3538 \newcount\secno        \secno=0  | 
         | 
  3539 \newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0  | 
         | 
  3540 \newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0  | 
         | 
  3541   | 
         | 
  3542 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...  | 
         | 
  3543 \newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@  | 
         | 
  3544 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} | 
         | 
  3545 % We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual  | 
         | 
  3546 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset.  | 
         | 
  3547 \def\appendixletter{% | 
         | 
  3548   \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%  | 
         | 
  3549   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%  | 
         | 
  3550   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%  | 
         | 
  3551   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%  | 
         | 
  3552   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%  | 
         | 
  3553   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%  | 
         | 
  3554   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%  | 
         | 
  3555   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%  | 
         | 
  3556   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%  | 
         | 
  3557   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%  | 
         | 
  3558   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%  | 
         | 
  3559   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%  | 
         | 
  3560   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%  | 
         | 
  3561   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%  | 
         | 
  3562   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%  | 
         | 
  3563   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%  | 
         | 
  3564   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%  | 
         | 
  3565   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%  | 
         | 
  3566   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%  | 
         | 
  3567   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%  | 
         | 
  3568   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%  | 
         | 
  3569   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%  | 
         | 
  3570   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%  | 
         | 
  3571   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%  | 
         | 
  3572   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%  | 
         | 
  3573   \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%  | 
         | 
  3574   % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is  | 
         | 
  3575   % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not  | 
         | 
  3576   % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out  | 
         | 
  3577   % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.  | 
         | 
  3578   \else\char\the\appendixno  | 
         | 
  3579   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi  | 
         | 
  3580   \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}  | 
         | 
  3581   | 
         | 
  3582 % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.  | 
         | 
  3583 % page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.  | 
         | 
  3584 \def\thischapter{} | 
         | 
  3585 \def\thissection{} | 
         | 
  3586   | 
         | 
  3587 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level  | 
         | 
  3588 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count  | 
         | 
  3589   | 
         | 
  3590 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.  | 
         | 
  3591 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} | 
         | 
  3592 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name  | 
         | 
  3593   | 
         | 
  3594 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.  | 
         | 
  3595 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} | 
         | 
  3596 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name  | 
         | 
  3597   | 
         | 
  3598 % Choose a numbered-heading macro  | 
         | 
  3599 % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections  | 
         | 
  3600 % #2 is text for heading  | 
         | 
  3601 \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 | 
         | 
  3602 \ifcase\absseclevel  | 
         | 
  3603   \chapterzzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3604 \or  | 
         | 
  3605   \seczzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3606 \or  | 
         | 
  3607   \numberedsubseczzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3608 \or  | 
         | 
  3609   \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3610 \else  | 
         | 
  3611   \ifnum \absseclevel<0  | 
         | 
  3612     \chapterzzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3613   \else  | 
         | 
  3614     \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3615   \fi  | 
         | 
  3616 \fi  | 
         | 
  3617 \suppressfirstparagraphindent  | 
         | 
  3618 }  | 
         | 
  3619   | 
         | 
  3620 % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels  | 
         | 
  3621 \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 | 
         | 
  3622 \ifcase\absseclevel  | 
         | 
  3623   \appendixzzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3624 \or  | 
         | 
  3625   \appendixsectionzzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3626 \or  | 
         | 
  3627   \appendixsubseczzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3628 \or  | 
         | 
  3629   \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3630 \else  | 
         | 
  3631   \ifnum \absseclevel<0  | 
         | 
  3632     \appendixzzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3633   \else  | 
         | 
  3634     \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3635   \fi  | 
         | 
  3636 \fi  | 
         | 
  3637 \suppressfirstparagraphindent  | 
         | 
  3638 }  | 
         | 
  3639   | 
         | 
  3640 % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels  | 
         | 
  3641 \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 | 
         | 
  3642 \ifcase\absseclevel  | 
         | 
  3643   \unnumberedzzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3644 \or  | 
         | 
  3645   \unnumberedseczzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3646 \or  | 
         | 
  3647   \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3648 \or  | 
         | 
  3649   \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3650 \else  | 
         | 
  3651   \ifnum \absseclevel<0  | 
         | 
  3652     \unnumberedzzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3653   \else  | 
         | 
  3654     \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} | 
         | 
  3655   \fi  | 
         | 
  3656 \fi  | 
         | 
  3657 \suppressfirstparagraphindent  | 
         | 
  3658 }  | 
         | 
  3659   | 
         | 
  3660 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  | 
         | 
  3661 \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title} | 
         | 
  3662 \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy} | 
         | 
  3663 \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz | 
         | 
  3664 \def\chapterzzz #1{% | 
         | 
  3665   \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0  | 
         | 
  3666   \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% | 
         | 
  3667   \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}% | 
         | 
  3668   \gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
         | 
  3669   \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% | 
         | 
  3670   % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter  | 
         | 
  3671   % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.  | 
         | 
  3672   \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}% | 
         | 
  3673   \writetocentry{chap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}} | 
         | 
  3674   \donoderef  | 
         | 
  3675   \global\let\section = \numberedsec  | 
         | 
  3676   \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec  | 
         | 
  3677   \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec  | 
         | 
  3678 }  | 
         | 
  3679   | 
         | 
  3680 % we use \chapno to avoid indenting back  | 
         | 
  3681 \def\appendixbox#1{% | 
         | 
  3682   \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} \the\chapno}% | 
         | 
  3683   \hbox to \wd0{#1\hss}} | 
         | 
  3684   | 
         | 
  3685 \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy} | 
         | 
  3686 \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz | 
         | 
  3687 \def\appendixzzz #1{% | 
         | 
  3688   \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0  | 
         | 
  3689   \global\advance \appendixno by 1  | 
         | 
  3690   \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% | 
         | 
  3691   \chapmacro {#1}{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}% | 
         | 
  3692   \gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
         | 
  3693   \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% | 
         | 
  3694   \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}% | 
         | 
  3695   \writetocentry{appendix}{#1}{{\appendixletter}} | 
         | 
  3696   \appendixnoderef  | 
         | 
  3697   \global\let\section = \appendixsec  | 
         | 
  3698   \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec  | 
         | 
  3699   \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec  | 
         | 
  3700 }  | 
         | 
  3701   | 
         | 
  3702 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.  | 
         | 
  3703 \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy} | 
         | 
  3704 \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}} | 
         | 
  3705   | 
         | 
  3706 % @top is like @unnumbered.  | 
         | 
  3707 \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} | 
         | 
  3708   | 
         | 
  3709 \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} | 
         | 
  3710 \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz | 
         | 
  3711 \def\unnumberedzzz #1{% | 
         | 
  3712   \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0  | 
         | 
  3713   %  | 
         | 
  3714   % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the | 
         | 
  3715   % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX  | 
         | 
  3716   % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX | 
         | 
  3717   % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant  | 
         | 
  3718   % to be executed, not expanded).  | 
         | 
  3719   %  | 
         | 
  3720   % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear  | 
         | 
  3721   % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use  | 
         | 
  3722   % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,  | 
         | 
  3723   % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for  | 
         | 
  3724   % the toc entries.)  | 
         | 
  3725   \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}% | 
         | 
  3726   %  | 
         | 
  3727   \unnumbchapmacro {#1}% | 
         | 
  3728   \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
         | 
  3729   \writetocentry{unnumbchap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}} | 
         | 
  3730   \unnumbnoderef  | 
         | 
  3731   \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec  | 
         | 
  3732   \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec  | 
         | 
  3733   \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec  | 
         | 
  3734 }  | 
         | 
  3735   | 
         | 
  3736 % Sections.  | 
         | 
  3737 \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy} | 
         | 
  3738 \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz | 
         | 
  3739 \def\seczzz #1{% | 
         | 
  3740   \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %  | 
         | 
  3741   \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}% | 
         | 
  3742   \writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}} | 
         | 
  3743   \donoderef  | 
         | 
  3744   \nobreak  | 
         | 
  3745 }  | 
         | 
  3746   | 
         | 
  3747 \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} | 
         | 
  3748 \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} | 
         | 
  3749 \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz | 
         | 
  3750 \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{% | 
         | 
  3751   \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %  | 
         | 
  3752   \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}% | 
         | 
  3753   \writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}} | 
         | 
  3754   \appendixnoderef  | 
         | 
  3755   \nobreak  | 
         | 
  3756 }  | 
         | 
  3757   | 
         | 
  3758 \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy} | 
         | 
  3759 \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz | 
         | 
  3760 \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{% | 
         | 
  3761   \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
         | 
  3762   \writetocentry{unnumbsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}} | 
         | 
  3763   \unnumbnoderef  | 
         | 
  3764   \nobreak  | 
         | 
  3765 }  | 
         | 
  3766   | 
         | 
  3767 % Subsections.  | 
         | 
  3768 \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy} | 
         | 
  3769 \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz | 
         | 
  3770 \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{% | 
         | 
  3771   \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % | 
         | 
  3772   \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% | 
         | 
  3773   \writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}} | 
         | 
  3774   \donoderef  | 
         | 
  3775   \nobreak  | 
         | 
  3776 }  | 
         | 
  3777   | 
         | 
  3778 \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy} | 
         | 
  3779 \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz | 
         | 
  3780 \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{% | 
         | 
  3781   \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % | 
         | 
  3782   \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% | 
         | 
  3783   \writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}} | 
         | 
  3784   \appendixnoderef  | 
         | 
  3785   \nobreak  | 
         | 
  3786 }  | 
         | 
  3787   | 
         | 
  3788 \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy} | 
         | 
  3789 \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz | 
         | 
  3790 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{% | 
         | 
  3791   \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
         | 
  3792   \writetocentry{unnumbsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}} | 
         | 
  3793   \unnumbnoderef  | 
         | 
  3794   \nobreak  | 
         | 
  3795 }  | 
         | 
  3796   | 
         | 
  3797 % Subsubsections.  | 
         | 
  3798 \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy} | 
         | 
  3799 \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz | 
         | 
  3800 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{% | 
         | 
  3801   \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % | 
         | 
  3802   \subsubsecheading {#1} | 
         | 
  3803     {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% | 
         | 
  3804   \writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}} | 
         | 
  3805   \donoderef  | 
         | 
  3806   \nobreak  | 
         | 
  3807 }  | 
         | 
  3808   | 
         | 
  3809 \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy} | 
         | 
  3810 \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz | 
         | 
  3811 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{% | 
         | 
  3812   \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % | 
         | 
  3813   \subsubsecheading {#1} | 
         | 
  3814     {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% | 
         | 
  3815   \writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}} | 
         | 
  3816   \appendixnoderef  | 
         | 
  3817   \nobreak  | 
         | 
  3818 }  | 
         | 
  3819   | 
         | 
  3820 \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy} | 
         | 
  3821 \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz | 
         | 
  3822 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{% | 
         | 
  3823   \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% | 
         | 
  3824   \writetocentry{unnumbsubsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}} | 
         | 
  3825   \unnumbnoderef  | 
         | 
  3826   \nobreak  | 
         | 
  3827 }  | 
         | 
  3828   | 
         | 
  3829 % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.  | 
         | 
  3830 % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.  | 
         | 
  3831 \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} | 
         | 
  3832 \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} | 
         | 
  3833 \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz} | 
         | 
  3834 \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz} | 
         | 
  3835 \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz} | 
         | 
  3836   | 
         | 
  3837 \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz} | 
         | 
  3838 \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz} | 
         | 
  3839 \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz} | 
         | 
  3840 \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz} | 
         | 
  3841   | 
         | 
  3842 \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz} | 
         | 
  3843 \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz} | 
         | 
  3844 \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz} | 
         | 
  3845 \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz} | 
         | 
  3846   | 
         | 
  3847 % These macros control what the section commands do, according  | 
         | 
  3848 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).  | 
         | 
  3849 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.  | 
         | 
  3850 \global\let\section = \numberedsec  | 
         | 
  3851 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec  | 
         | 
  3852 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec  | 
         | 
  3853   | 
         | 
  3854 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading  | 
         | 
  3855   | 
         | 
  3856 % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:  | 
         | 
  3857 %       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit  | 
         | 
  3858 %          overlong headings to fold.  | 
         | 
  3859 %       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a  | 
         | 
  3860 %          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.  | 
         | 
  3861 %       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and  | 
         | 
  3862 %          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.  | 
         | 
  3863   | 
         | 
  3864   | 
         | 
  3865 \def\majorheading{% | 
         | 
  3866   {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% | 
         | 
  3867   \parsearg\chapheadingzzz  | 
         | 
  3868 }  | 
         | 
  3869   | 
         | 
  3870 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} | 
         | 
  3871 \def\chapheadingzzz #1{% | 
         | 
  3872   {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | 
         | 
  3873                     \parindent=0pt\raggedright  | 
         | 
  3874                     \rm #1\hfill}}%  | 
         | 
  3875   \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax  | 
         | 
  3876   \suppressfirstparagraphindent  | 
         | 
  3877 }  | 
         | 
  3878   | 
         | 
  3879 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.  | 
         | 
  3880 \def\heading{\parsearg\doheading} | 
         | 
  3881 \def\subheading{\parsearg\dosubheading} | 
         | 
  3882 \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\dosubsubheading} | 
         | 
  3883 \def\doheading#1{\plainsecheading{#1}\suppressfirstparagraphindent} | 
         | 
  3884 \def\dosubheading#1{\plainsubsecheading{#1}\suppressfirstparagraphindent} | 
         | 
  3885 \def\dosubsubheading#1{\plainsubsubsecheading{#1}\suppressfirstparagraphindent} | 
         | 
  3886   | 
         | 
  3887 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only  | 
         | 
  3888 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),  | 
         | 
  3889 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.  | 
         | 
  3890   | 
         | 
  3891 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)  | 
         | 
  3892 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} | 
         | 
  3893   | 
         | 
  3894 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} | 
         | 
  3895   | 
         | 
  3896 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it  | 
         | 
  3897 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)  | 
         | 
  3898   | 
         | 
  3899 \newskip\chapheadingskip  | 
         | 
  3900   | 
         | 
  3901 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} | 
         | 
  3902 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} | 
         | 
  3903 \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} | 
         | 
  3904   | 
         | 
  3905 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} | 
         | 
  3906   | 
         | 
  3907 \def\CHAPPAGoff{% | 
         | 
  3908 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager  | 
         | 
  3909 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak  | 
         | 
  3910 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}  | 
         | 
  3911   | 
         | 
  3912 \def\CHAPPAGon{% | 
         | 
  3913 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager  | 
         | 
  3914 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager  | 
         | 
  3915 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager  | 
         | 
  3916 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} | 
         | 
  3917   | 
         | 
  3918 \def\CHAPPAGodd{ | 
         | 
  3919 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage  | 
         | 
  3920 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage  | 
         | 
  3921 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage  | 
         | 
  3922 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} | 
         | 
  3923   | 
         | 
  3924 \CHAPPAGon  | 
         | 
  3925   | 
         | 
  3926 \def\CHAPFplain{ | 
         | 
  3927 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain  | 
         | 
  3928 \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain  | 
         | 
  3929 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}  | 
         | 
  3930   | 
         | 
  3931 % Plain chapter opening.  | 
         | 
  3932 % #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.  | 
         | 
  3933 \def\chfplain#1#2{% | 
         | 
  3934   \pchapsepmacro  | 
         | 
  3935   {% | 
         | 
  3936     \chapfonts \rm  | 
         | 
  3937     \def\chapnum{#2}% | 
         | 
  3938     \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}% | 
         | 
  3939     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright | 
         | 
  3940           \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe  | 
         | 
  3941           \unhbox0 #1\par}%  | 
         | 
  3942   }%  | 
         | 
  3943   \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title  | 
         | 
  3944   \nobreak  | 
         | 
  3945 }  | 
         | 
  3946   | 
         | 
  3947 % Plain opening for unnumbered.  | 
         | 
  3948 \def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}} | 
         | 
  3949   | 
         | 
  3950 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.  | 
         | 
  3951 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax  | 
         | 
  3952 \def\centerchfplain#1{{% | 
         | 
  3953   \def\centerparametersmaybe{% | 
         | 
  3954     \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip  | 
         | 
  3955     \leftskip = \rightskip  | 
         | 
  3956     \parfillskip = 0pt  | 
         | 
  3957   }%  | 
         | 
  3958   \chfplain{#1}{}% | 
         | 
  3959 }}  | 
         | 
  3960   | 
         | 
  3961 \CHAPFplain % The default  | 
         | 
  3962   | 
         | 
  3963 \def\unnchfopen #1{% | 
         | 
  3964 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | 
         | 
  3965                        \parindent=0pt\raggedright  | 
         | 
  3966                        \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak  | 
         | 
  3967 }  | 
         | 
  3968   | 
         | 
  3969 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts | 
         | 
  3970 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% | 
         | 
  3971 \par\penalty 5000 %  | 
         | 
  3972 }  | 
         | 
  3973   | 
         | 
  3974 \def\centerchfopen #1{% | 
         | 
  3975 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | 
         | 
  3976                        \parindent=0pt  | 
         | 
  3977                        \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | 
         | 
  3978 }  | 
         | 
  3979   | 
         | 
  3980 \def\CHAPFopen{ | 
         | 
  3981 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen  | 
         | 
  3982 \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen  | 
         | 
  3983 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}  | 
         | 
  3984   | 
         | 
  3985   | 
         | 
  3986 % Section titles.  | 
         | 
  3987 \newskip\secheadingskip  | 
         | 
  3988 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}} | 
         | 
  3989 \def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}} | 
         | 
  3990 \def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}} | 
         | 
  3991   | 
         | 
  3992 % Subsection titles.  | 
         | 
  3993 \newskip \subsecheadingskip  | 
         | 
  3994 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}} | 
         | 
  3995 \def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}} | 
         | 
  3996 \def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}} | 
         | 
  3997   | 
         | 
  3998 % Subsubsection titles.  | 
         | 
  3999 \let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip  | 
         | 
  4000 \let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak  | 
         | 
  4001 \def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}} | 
         | 
  4002 \def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}} | 
         | 
  4003   | 
         | 
  4004   | 
         | 
  4005 % Print any size section title.  | 
         | 
  4006 %  | 
         | 
  4007 % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section  | 
         | 
  4008 % number (maybe empty), #3 the text.  | 
         | 
  4009 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  4010   {% | 
         | 
  4011     \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip  | 
         | 
  4012     \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname  | 
         | 
  4013   }%  | 
         | 
  4014   {% | 
         | 
  4015     % Switch to the right set of fonts.  | 
         | 
  4016     \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm  | 
         | 
  4017     %  | 
         | 
  4018     % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.  | 
         | 
  4019     \def\secnum{#2}% | 
         | 
  4020     \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}% | 
         | 
  4021     %  | 
         | 
  4022     \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright | 
         | 
  4023           \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number  | 
         | 
  4024           \unhbox0 #3}%  | 
         | 
  4025   }%  | 
         | 
  4026   % Add extra space after the heading -- either a line space or a  | 
         | 
  4027   % paragraph space, whichever is more.  (Some people like to set  | 
         | 
  4028   % \parskip to large values for some reason.)  Don't allow stretch, though.  | 
         | 
  4029   \nobreak  | 
         | 
  4030   \ifdim\parskip>\normalbaselineskip  | 
         | 
  4031     \kern\parskip  | 
         | 
  4032   \else  | 
         | 
  4033     \kern\normalbaselineskip  | 
         | 
  4034   \fi  | 
         | 
  4035   \nobreak  | 
         | 
  4036 }  | 
         | 
  4037   | 
         | 
  4038   | 
         | 
  4039 \message{toc,} | 
         | 
  4040 % Table of contents.  | 
         | 
  4041 \newwrite\tocfile  | 
         | 
  4042   | 
         | 
  4043 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.  | 
         | 
  4044 % Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the | 
         | 
  4045 % argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.  | 
         | 
  4046 %  | 
         | 
  4047 % Usage: \writetocentry{chap}{The Name of The Game}{{\the\chapno}} | 
         | 
  4048 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or  | 
         | 
  4049 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.  | 
         | 
  4050 %  | 
         | 
  4051 \newif\iftocfileopened  | 
         | 
  4052 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  4053   \iftocfileopened\else  | 
         | 
  4054     \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc  | 
         | 
  4055     \global\tocfileopenedtrue  | 
         | 
  4056   \fi  | 
         | 
  4057   %  | 
         | 
  4058   \iflinks  | 
         | 
  4059     \toks0 = {#2}% | 
         | 
  4060     \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}#3{\folio}}}% | 
         | 
  4061     \temp  | 
         | 
  4062   \fi  | 
         | 
  4063   %  | 
         | 
  4064   % Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which  | 
         | 
  4065   % will be the target of the links in the table of contents.  We can't  | 
         | 
  4066   % just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and  | 
         | 
  4067   % 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages  | 
         | 
  4068   % of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and  | 
         | 
  4069   % two named `2'.  | 
         | 
  4070   \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi  | 
         | 
  4071 }  | 
         | 
  4072   | 
         | 
  4073 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in  | 
         | 
  4074 \newcount\savepageno  | 
         | 
  4075 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1  | 
         | 
  4076   | 
         | 
  4077 % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written  | 
         | 
  4078 % to \tocfile.  | 
         | 
  4079 %  | 
         | 
  4080 \def\startcontents#1{% | 
         | 
  4081    % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should  | 
         | 
  4082    % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain  | 
         | 
  4083    % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.  | 
         | 
  4084    % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>  | 
         | 
  4085    \contentsalignmacro  | 
         | 
  4086    \immediate\closeout\tocfile  | 
         | 
  4087    %  | 
         | 
  4088    % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.  | 
         | 
  4089    % It is abundantly clear what they are.  | 
         | 
  4090    \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}% | 
         | 
  4091    \savepageno = \pageno  | 
         | 
  4092    \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.  | 
         | 
  4093       \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11 | 
         | 
  4094       % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section  | 
         | 
  4095       % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.  | 
         | 
  4096       %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi  | 
         | 
  4097       \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.  | 
         | 
  4098       \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.  | 
         | 
  4099       %  | 
         | 
  4100       % Roman numerals for page numbers.  | 
         | 
  4101       \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi  | 
         | 
  4102 }  | 
         | 
  4103   | 
         | 
  4104   | 
         | 
  4105 % Normal (long) toc.  | 
         | 
  4106 \def\contents{% | 
         | 
  4107    \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% | 
         | 
  4108      \openin 1 \jobname.toc  | 
         | 
  4109      \ifeof 1 \else  | 
         | 
  4110        \closein 1  | 
         | 
  4111        \input \jobname.toc  | 
         | 
  4112      \fi  | 
         | 
  4113      \vfill \eject  | 
         | 
  4114      \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect  | 
         | 
  4115      \pdfmakeoutlines  | 
         | 
  4116    \endgroup  | 
         | 
  4117    \lastnegativepageno = \pageno  | 
         | 
  4118    \global\pageno = \savepageno  | 
         | 
  4119 }  | 
         | 
  4120   | 
         | 
  4121 % And just the chapters.  | 
         | 
  4122 \def\summarycontents{% | 
         | 
  4123    \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% | 
         | 
  4124       %  | 
         | 
  4125       \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry  | 
         | 
  4126       \let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry  | 
         | 
  4127       \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry  | 
         | 
  4128       % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.  | 
         | 
  4129       \secfonts  | 
         | 
  4130       \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf  | 
         | 
  4131       \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt  | 
         | 
  4132       \rm  | 
         | 
  4133       \hyphenpenalty = 10000  | 
         | 
  4134       \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.  | 
         | 
  4135       \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{} | 
         | 
  4136       \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{} | 
         | 
  4137       \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{} | 
         | 
  4138       \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry  | 
         | 
  4139       \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry  | 
         | 
  4140       \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry  | 
         | 
  4141       \openin 1 \jobname.toc  | 
         | 
  4142       \ifeof 1 \else  | 
         | 
  4143         \closein 1  | 
         | 
  4144         \input \jobname.toc  | 
         | 
  4145       \fi  | 
         | 
  4146      \vfill \eject  | 
         | 
  4147      \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect  | 
         | 
  4148    \endgroup  | 
         | 
  4149    \lastnegativepageno = \pageno  | 
         | 
  4150    \global\pageno = \savepageno  | 
         | 
  4151 }  | 
         | 
  4152 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents  | 
         | 
  4153   | 
         | 
  4154 \ifpdf  | 
         | 
  4155   \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}% | 
         | 
  4156 \fi  | 
         | 
  4157   | 
         | 
  4158 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.  | 
         | 
  4159 % The first argument is the chapter or section name.  | 
         | 
  4160 % The last argument is the page number.  | 
         | 
  4161 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...  | 
         | 
  4162   | 
         | 
  4163 % Chapters, in the main contents.  | 
         | 
  4164 \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}} | 
         | 
  4165 %  | 
         | 
  4166 % Chapters, in the short toc.  | 
         | 
  4167 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.  | 
         | 
  4168 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  4169   \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}% | 
         | 
  4170 }  | 
         | 
  4171   | 
         | 
  4172 % Appendices, in the main contents.  | 
         | 
  4173 \def\appendixentry#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  4174   \dochapentry{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} #2}\labelspace#1}{#3}} | 
         | 
  4175 %  | 
         | 
  4176 % Appendices, in the short toc.  | 
         | 
  4177 \let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry  | 
         | 
  4178   | 
         | 
  4179 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.  | 
         | 
  4180 % The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.  | 
         | 
  4181 % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry  | 
         | 
  4182 % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry  | 
         | 
  4183 % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.  | 
         | 
  4184 %  | 
         | 
  4185 \newdimen\shortappendixwidth  | 
         | 
  4186 %  | 
         | 
  4187 \def\shortchaplabel#1{% | 
         | 
  4188   % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the  | 
         | 
  4189   % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.  | 
         | 
  4190   % But use \hss just in case.  | 
         | 
  4191   % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after  | 
         | 
  4192   % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)  | 
         | 
  4193   \dimen0 = 1em  | 
         | 
  4194   \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}% | 
         | 
  4195 }  | 
         | 
  4196   | 
         | 
  4197 % Unnumbered chapters.  | 
         | 
  4198 \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#1}{#3}} | 
         | 
  4199 \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2#3{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}} | 
         | 
  4200   | 
         | 
  4201 % Sections.  | 
         | 
  4202 \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}} | 
         | 
  4203 \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} | 
         | 
  4204   | 
         | 
  4205 % Subsections.  | 
         | 
  4206 \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}} | 
         | 
  4207 \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#5}} | 
         | 
  4208   | 
         | 
  4209 % And subsubsections.  | 
         | 
  4210 \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{% | 
         | 
  4211   \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}} | 
         | 
  4212 \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#6}} | 
         | 
  4213   | 
         | 
  4214 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.  | 
         | 
  4215 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc  | 
         | 
  4216   | 
         | 
  4217 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the  | 
         | 
  4218 % page number.  | 
         | 
  4219 %  | 
         | 
  4220 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters  | 
         | 
  4221 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.  | 
         | 
  4222 \def\dochapentry#1#2{% | 
         | 
  4223    \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip  | 
         | 
  4224    \begingroup  | 
         | 
  4225      \chapentryfonts  | 
         | 
  4226      \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | 
         | 
  4227    \endgroup  | 
         | 
  4228    \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip  | 
         | 
  4229 }  | 
         | 
  4230   | 
         | 
  4231 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup | 
         | 
  4232   \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent  | 
         | 
  4233   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | 
         | 
  4234 \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  4235   | 
         | 
  4236 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | 
         | 
  4237   \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent  | 
         | 
  4238   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | 
         | 
  4239 \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  4240   | 
         | 
  4241 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | 
         | 
  4242   \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent  | 
         | 
  4243   \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% | 
         | 
  4244 \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  4245   | 
         | 
  4246 % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for  | 
         | 
  4247 % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We  | 
         | 
  4248 % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist  | 
         | 
  4249 % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)  | 
         | 
  4250 \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup | 
         | 
  4251   \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks  | 
         | 
  4252   % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is  | 
         | 
  4253   % typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we  | 
         | 
  4254   % have to do the usual translation tricks.  | 
         | 
  4255   \entry{#1}{#2}% | 
         | 
  4256 \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  4257   | 
         | 
  4258 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.  | 
         | 
  4259 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} | 
         | 
  4260   | 
         | 
  4261 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} | 
         | 
  4262 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} | 
         | 
  4263   | 
         | 
  4264 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} | 
         | 
  4265 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} | 
         | 
  4266 \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts  | 
         | 
  4267 \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts  | 
         | 
  4268   | 
         | 
  4269   | 
         | 
  4270 \message{environments,} | 
         | 
  4271 % @foo ... @end foo.  | 
         | 
  4272   | 
         | 
  4273 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. | 
         | 
  4274 %  | 
         | 
  4275 % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of  | 
         | 
  4276 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.  | 
         | 
  4277 %  | 
         | 
  4278 \def\point{$\star$} | 
         | 
  4279 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} | 
         | 
  4280 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} | 
         | 
  4281 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} | 
         | 
  4282 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} | 
         | 
  4283   | 
         | 
  4284 % The @error{} command. | 
         | 
  4285 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.  | 
         | 
  4286 %  | 
         | 
  4287 \newbox\errorbox  | 
         | 
  4288 %  | 
         | 
  4289 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. | 
         | 
  4290 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules  | 
         | 
  4291 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)  | 
         | 
  4292 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt} | 
         | 
  4293 %  | 
         | 
  4294 \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil | 
         | 
  4295    \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.  | 
         | 
  4296    \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.  | 
         | 
  4297    \vbox{ | 
         | 
  4298       \hrule height\dimen2  | 
         | 
  4299       \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text. | 
         | 
  4300          \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. | 
         | 
  4301          \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.  | 
         | 
  4302       \hrule height\dimen2}  | 
         | 
  4303     \hfil}  | 
         | 
  4304 %  | 
         | 
  4305 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} | 
         | 
  4306   | 
         | 
  4307 % @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.  | 
         | 
  4308 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.  | 
         | 
  4309 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.  | 
         | 
  4310   | 
         | 
  4311 \def\tex{\begingroup | 
         | 
  4312   \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 | 
         | 
  4313   \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6  | 
         | 
  4314   \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie  | 
         | 
  4315   \catcode `\%=14  | 
         | 
  4316   \catcode `\+=\other  | 
         | 
  4317   \catcode `\"=\other  | 
         | 
  4318   \catcode `\==\other  | 
         | 
  4319   \catcode `\|=\other  | 
         | 
  4320   \catcode `\<=\other  | 
         | 
  4321   \catcode `\>=\other  | 
         | 
  4322   \escapechar=`\\  | 
         | 
  4323   %  | 
         | 
  4324   \let\b=\ptexb  | 
         | 
  4325   \let\bullet=\ptexbullet  | 
         | 
  4326   \let\c=\ptexc  | 
         | 
  4327   \let\,=\ptexcomma  | 
         | 
  4328   \let\.=\ptexdot  | 
         | 
  4329   \let\dots=\ptexdots  | 
         | 
  4330   \let\equiv=\ptexequiv  | 
         | 
  4331   \let\!=\ptexexclam  | 
         | 
  4332   \let\i=\ptexi  | 
         | 
  4333   \let\indent=\ptexindent  | 
         | 
  4334   \let\{=\ptexlbrace | 
         | 
  4335   \let\+=\tabalign  | 
         | 
  4336   \let\}=\ptexrbrace  | 
         | 
  4337   \let\/=\ptexslash  | 
         | 
  4338   \let\*=\ptexstar  | 
         | 
  4339   \let\t=\ptext  | 
         | 
  4340   %  | 
         | 
  4341   \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% | 
         | 
  4342   \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% | 
         | 
  4343   \def\@{@}% | 
         | 
  4344 \let\Etex=\endgroup}  | 
         | 
  4345   | 
         | 
  4346 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp.  | 
         | 
  4347 % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,  | 
         | 
  4348 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).  | 
         | 
  4349   | 
         | 
  4350 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.  | 
         | 
  4351 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in  | 
         | 
  4352   | 
         | 
  4353 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other  | 
         | 
  4354 % such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't  | 
         | 
  4355 % have any width.  | 
         | 
  4356 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} | 
         | 
  4357   | 
         | 
  4358 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword  | 
         | 
  4359 % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this  | 
         | 
  4360 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input  | 
         | 
  4361 % should produce a line of output anyway.  | 
         | 
  4362 %  | 
         | 
  4363 {\obeyspaces % | 
         | 
  4364 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}} | 
         | 
  4365   | 
         | 
  4366 % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is  | 
         | 
  4367 % for use in \parsearg.  | 
         | 
  4368 {\sepspaces% | 
         | 
  4369 \global\let\obeyedspace= }  | 
         | 
  4370   | 
         | 
  4371 % This space is always present above and below environments.  | 
         | 
  4372 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt  | 
         | 
  4373   | 
         | 
  4374 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here  | 
         | 
  4375 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip  | 
         | 
  4376 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the  | 
         | 
  4377 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.  | 
         | 
  4378 %  | 
         | 
  4379 \def\aboveenvbreak{{% | 
         | 
  4380   % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz, q.v.  | 
         | 
  4381   \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else  | 
         | 
  4382     \advance\envskipamount by \parskip  | 
         | 
  4383     \endgraf  | 
         | 
  4384     \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount  | 
         | 
  4385       \removelastskip  | 
         | 
  4386       % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak  | 
         | 
  4387       % or better ...  | 
         | 
  4388       \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \else \penalty-50 \fi  | 
         | 
  4389       \vskip\envskipamount  | 
         | 
  4390     \fi  | 
         | 
  4391   \fi  | 
         | 
  4392 }}  | 
         | 
  4393   | 
         | 
  4394 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak  | 
         | 
  4395   | 
         | 
  4396 % \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.  | 
         | 
  4397 \let\nonarrowing=\relax  | 
         | 
  4398   | 
         | 
  4399 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around  | 
         | 
  4400 % environment contents.  | 
         | 
  4401 \font\circle=lcircle10  | 
         | 
  4402 \newdimen\circthick  | 
         | 
  4403 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner  | 
         | 
  4404 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip  | 
         | 
  4405 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle  | 
         | 
  4406 %  | 
         | 
  4407 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth | 
         | 
  4408 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} | 
         | 
  4409 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} | 
         | 
  4410 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} | 
         | 
  4411 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | 
         | 
  4412         \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr  | 
         | 
  4413         \hskip\rskip}}  | 
         | 
  4414 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | 
         | 
  4415         \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr  | 
         | 
  4416         \hskip\rskip}}  | 
         | 
  4417 %  | 
         | 
  4418 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip  | 
         | 
  4419   | 
         | 
  4420 \def\cartouche{% | 
         | 
  4421 \par  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.  | 
         | 
  4422 \begingroup  | 
         | 
  4423         \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip  | 
         | 
  4424         \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.  | 
         | 
  4425         \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip  | 
         | 
  4426                           \advance\cartinner by-\rskip  | 
         | 
  4427         \cartouter=\hsize  | 
         | 
  4428         \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either  | 
         | 
  4429 %                                    side, and for 6pt waste from  | 
         | 
  4430 %                                    each corner char, and rule thickness  | 
         | 
  4431         \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip  | 
         | 
  4432         % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.  | 
         | 
  4433         \let\nonarrowing=\comment  | 
         | 
  4434         \vbox\bgroup  | 
         | 
  4435                 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt  | 
         | 
  4436                 \carttop  | 
         | 
  4437                 \hbox\bgroup  | 
         | 
  4438                         \hskip\lskip  | 
         | 
  4439                         \vrule\kern3pt  | 
         | 
  4440                         \vbox\bgroup  | 
         | 
  4441                                 \hsize=\cartinner  | 
         | 
  4442                                 \kern3pt  | 
         | 
  4443                                 \begingroup  | 
         | 
  4444                                         \baselineskip=\normbskip  | 
         | 
  4445                                         \lineskip=\normlskip  | 
         | 
  4446                                         \parskip=\normpskip  | 
         | 
  4447                                         \vskip -\parskip  | 
         | 
  4448 \def\Ecartouche{% | 
         | 
  4449                                 \endgroup  | 
         | 
  4450                                 \kern3pt  | 
         | 
  4451                         \egroup  | 
         | 
  4452                         \kern3pt\vrule  | 
         | 
  4453                         \hskip\rskip  | 
         | 
  4454                 \egroup  | 
         | 
  4455                 \cartbot  | 
         | 
  4456         \egroup  | 
         | 
  4457 \endgroup  | 
         | 
  4458 }}  | 
         | 
  4459   | 
         | 
  4460   | 
         | 
  4461 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,  | 
         | 
  4462 % inside a group.  | 
         | 
  4463 \def\nonfillstart{% | 
         | 
  4464   \aboveenvbreak  | 
         | 
  4465   \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body  | 
         | 
  4466   \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy  | 
         | 
  4467   \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.  | 
         | 
  4468   \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines  | 
         | 
  4469   \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output  | 
         | 
  4470   \parskip = 0pt  | 
         | 
  4471   \parindent = 0pt  | 
         | 
  4472   \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes  | 
         | 
  4473   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing  | 
         | 
  4474   % at next level down.  | 
         | 
  4475   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax  | 
         | 
  4476     \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing  | 
         | 
  4477     \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing  | 
         | 
  4478     \let\exdent=\nofillexdent  | 
         | 
  4479     \let\nonarrowing=\relax  | 
         | 
  4480   \fi  | 
         | 
  4481 }  | 
         | 
  4482   | 
         | 
  4483 % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular  | 
         | 
  4484 % environment, so the error checking in \end will work.  | 
         | 
  4485 %  | 
         | 
  4486 % To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via  | 
         | 
  4487 % \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep  | 
         | 
  4488 % the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be  | 
         | 
  4489 % inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after  | 
         | 
  4490 % the environment.  | 
         | 
  4491 %  | 
         | 
  4492 \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup} | 
         | 
  4493   | 
         | 
  4494 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.  | 
         | 
  4495 \def\lisp{\begingroup | 
         | 
  4496   \nonfillstart  | 
         | 
  4497   \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish  | 
         | 
  4498   \tt  | 
         | 
  4499   \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.  | 
         | 
  4500   \gobble       % eat return  | 
         | 
  4501 }  | 
         | 
  4502   | 
         | 
  4503 % @example: Same as @lisp.  | 
         | 
  4504 \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} | 
         | 
  4505   | 
         | 
  4506 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.  | 
         | 
  4507 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.  | 
         | 
  4508 \def\smalllisp{\begingroup | 
         | 
  4509   \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% | 
         | 
  4510   \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% | 
         | 
  4511   \smallexamplefonts  | 
         | 
  4512   \lisp  | 
         | 
  4513 }  | 
         | 
  4514 \let\smallexample = \smalllisp  | 
         | 
  4515   | 
         | 
  4516   | 
         | 
  4517 % @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.  | 
         | 
  4518 %  | 
         | 
  4519 \def\display{\begingroup | 
         | 
  4520   \nonfillstart  | 
         | 
  4521   \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish  | 
         | 
  4522   \gobble  | 
         | 
  4523 }  | 
         | 
  4524 %  | 
         | 
  4525 % @smalldisplay: @display plus smaller fonts.  | 
         | 
  4526 %  | 
         | 
  4527 \def\smalldisplay{\begingroup | 
         | 
  4528   \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% | 
         | 
  4529   \smallexamplefonts \rm  | 
         | 
  4530   \display  | 
         | 
  4531 }  | 
         | 
  4532   | 
         | 
  4533 % @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.  | 
         | 
  4534 %  | 
         | 
  4535 \def\format{\begingroup | 
         | 
  4536   \let\nonarrowing = t  | 
         | 
  4537   \nonfillstart  | 
         | 
  4538   \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish  | 
         | 
  4539   \gobble  | 
         | 
  4540 }  | 
         | 
  4541 %  | 
         | 
  4542 % @smallformat: @format plus smaller fonts.  | 
         | 
  4543 %  | 
         | 
  4544 \def\smallformat{\begingroup | 
         | 
  4545   \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% | 
         | 
  4546   \smallexamplefonts \rm  | 
         | 
  4547   \format  | 
         | 
  4548 }  | 
         | 
  4549   | 
         | 
  4550 % @flushleft (same as @format).  | 
         | 
  4551 %  | 
         | 
  4552 \def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format} | 
         | 
  4553   | 
         | 
  4554 % @flushright.  | 
         | 
  4555 %  | 
         | 
  4556 \def\flushright{\begingroup | 
         | 
  4557   \let\nonarrowing = t  | 
         | 
  4558   \nonfillstart  | 
         | 
  4559   \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish  | 
         | 
  4560   \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill  | 
         | 
  4561   \gobble  | 
         | 
  4562 }  | 
         | 
  4563   | 
         | 
  4564   | 
         | 
  4565 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)  | 
         | 
  4566 % and narrows the margins.  | 
         | 
  4567 %  | 
         | 
  4568 \def\quotation{% | 
         | 
  4569   \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body  | 
         | 
  4570   {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip | 
         | 
  4571   \parindent=0pt  | 
         | 
  4572   % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're  | 
         | 
  4573   % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...  | 
         | 
  4574   \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}% | 
         | 
  4575   %  | 
         | 
  4576   % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.  | 
         | 
  4577   \ifx\nonarrowing\relax  | 
         | 
  4578     \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing  | 
         | 
  4579     \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing  | 
         | 
  4580     \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing  | 
         | 
  4581     \let\nonarrowing = \relax  | 
         | 
  4582   \fi  | 
         | 
  4583 }  | 
         | 
  4584   | 
         | 
  4585   | 
         | 
  4586 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} | 
         | 
  4587 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,  | 
         | 
  4588 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:  | 
         | 
  4589 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org  | 
         | 
  4590 %  | 
         | 
  4591 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.  | 
         | 
  4592 %  | 
         | 
  4593 % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets  | 
         | 
  4594 % active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a  | 
         | 
  4595 % verbatim line.  | 
         | 
  4596 \def\dospecials{% | 
         | 
  4597   \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% | 
         | 
  4598   \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%  | 
         | 
  4599   \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%  | 
         | 
  4600 }  | 
         | 
  4601 %  | 
         | 
  4602 % [Knuth] p. 380  | 
         | 
  4603 \def\uncatcodespecials{% | 
         | 
  4604   \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials} | 
         | 
  4605 %  | 
         | 
  4606 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391  | 
         | 
  4607 % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font  | 
         | 
  4608 \begingroup  | 
         | 
  4609   \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq} | 
         | 
  4610 \endgroup  | 
         | 
  4611 %  | 
         | 
  4612 % Setup for the @verb command.  | 
         | 
  4613 %  | 
         | 
  4614 % Eight spaces for a tab  | 
         | 
  4615 \begingroup  | 
         | 
  4616   \catcode`\^^I=\active  | 
         | 
  4617   \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} | 
         | 
  4618 \endgroup  | 
         | 
  4619 %  | 
         | 
  4620 \def\setupverb{% | 
         | 
  4621   \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim  | 
         | 
  4622   \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% | 
         | 
  4623   \catcode`\`=\active  | 
         | 
  4624   \tabeightspaces  | 
         | 
  4625   % Respect line breaks,  | 
         | 
  4626   % print special symbols as themselves, and  | 
         | 
  4627   % make each space count  | 
         | 
  4628   % must do in this order:  | 
         | 
  4629   \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces  | 
         | 
  4630 }  | 
         | 
  4631   | 
         | 
  4632 % Setup for the @verbatim environment  | 
         | 
  4633 %  | 
         | 
  4634 % Real tab expansion  | 
         | 
  4635 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount | 
         | 
  4636 %  | 
         | 
  4637 \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} | 
         | 
  4638 \begingroup  | 
         | 
  4639   \catcode`\^^I=\active  | 
         | 
  4640   \gdef\tabexpand{% | 
         | 
  4641     \catcode`\^^I=\active  | 
         | 
  4642     \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup | 
         | 
  4643       \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab  | 
         | 
  4644       \divide\dimen0 by\tabw  | 
         | 
  4645       \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw  | 
         | 
  4646       \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw  | 
         | 
  4647       \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox  | 
         | 
  4648     }%  | 
         | 
  4649   }  | 
         | 
  4650 \endgroup  | 
         | 
  4651 \def\setupverbatim{% | 
         | 
  4652   % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim  | 
         | 
  4653   \tt  | 
         | 
  4654   \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% | 
         | 
  4655   \catcode`\`=\active  | 
         | 
  4656   \tabexpand  | 
         | 
  4657   % Respect line breaks,  | 
         | 
  4658   % print special symbols as themselves, and  | 
         | 
  4659   % make each space count  | 
         | 
  4660   % must do in this order:  | 
         | 
  4661   \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces  | 
         | 
  4662   \everypar{\starttabbox}% | 
         | 
  4663 }  | 
         | 
  4664   | 
         | 
  4665 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique  | 
         | 
  4666 % delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a  | 
         | 
  4667 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:  | 
         | 
  4668 %  | 
         | 
  4669 %    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} | 
         | 
  4670 %  | 
         | 
  4671 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} | 
         | 
  4672 \begingroup  | 
         | 
  4673   \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12 | 
         | 
  4674   \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] | 
         | 
  4675 \endgroup  | 
         | 
  4676 %  | 
         | 
  4677 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} | 
         | 
  4678 %  | 
         | 
  4679 %  | 
         | 
  4680 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that  | 
         | 
  4681 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:  | 
         | 
  4682 %  | 
         | 
  4683 %     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} | 
         | 
  4684 %  | 
         | 
  4685 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,  | 
         | 
  4686 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': | 
         | 
  4687 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. | 
         | 
  4688 %  | 
         | 
  4689 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]  | 
         | 
  4690 %% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know  | 
         | 
  4691 %% \begingroup  | 
         | 
  4692 %% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1  | 
         | 
  4693 %% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active | 
         | 
  4694 %% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[  | 
         | 
  4695 %% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]  | 
         | 
  4696 %% |endgroup  | 
         | 
  4697 %  | 
         | 
  4698 \begingroup  | 
         | 
  4699   \catcode`\ =\active  | 
         | 
  4700   \obeylines %  | 
         | 
  4701   % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end  | 
         | 
  4702   % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank  | 
         | 
  4703   % line in the output.  | 
         | 
  4704   \gdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\end{verbatim}}% | 
         | 
  4705 \endgroup  | 
         | 
  4706 %  | 
         | 
  4707 \def\verbatim{% | 
         | 
  4708   \def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% | 
         | 
  4709   \begingroup  | 
         | 
  4710     \nonfillstart  | 
         | 
  4711     \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent  | 
         | 
  4712     \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim  | 
         | 
  4713 }  | 
         | 
  4714   | 
         | 
  4715 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.  | 
         | 
  4716 %  | 
         | 
  4717 % Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).  | 
         | 
  4718 \def\verbatiminclude{% | 
         | 
  4719   \begingroup  | 
         | 
  4720     \catcode`\\=\other  | 
         | 
  4721     \catcode`~=\other  | 
         | 
  4722     \catcode`^=\other  | 
         | 
  4723     \catcode`_=\other  | 
         | 
  4724     \catcode`|=\other  | 
         | 
  4725     \catcode`<=\other  | 
         | 
  4726     \catcode`>=\other  | 
         | 
  4727     \catcode`+=\other  | 
         | 
  4728     \parsearg\doverbatiminclude  | 
         | 
  4729 }  | 
         | 
  4730 \def\setupverbatiminclude{% | 
         | 
  4731   \begingroup  | 
         | 
  4732     \nonfillstart  | 
         | 
  4733     \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent  | 
         | 
  4734     \begingroup\setupverbatim  | 
         | 
  4735 }  | 
         | 
  4736 %  | 
         | 
  4737 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% | 
         | 
  4738      % Restore active chars for included file.  | 
         | 
  4739   \endgroup  | 
         | 
  4740   \begingroup  | 
         | 
  4741     \let\value=\expandablevalue  | 
         | 
  4742     \def\thisfile{#1}% | 
         | 
  4743     \expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile  | 
         | 
  4744   \endgroup  | 
         | 
  4745   \nonfillfinish  | 
         | 
  4746   \endgroup  | 
         | 
  4747 }  | 
         | 
  4748   | 
         | 
  4749 % @copying ... @end copying.  | 
         | 
  4750 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later.  Many commands won't be  | 
         | 
  4751 % allowed in this context, but that's ok.  | 
         | 
  4752 %  | 
         | 
  4753 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.  | 
         | 
  4754 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the  | 
         | 
  4755 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done  | 
         | 
  4756 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source  | 
         | 
  4757 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as  | 
         | 
  4758 % possible is very desirable.  | 
         | 
  4759 %  | 
         | 
  4760 \def\copying{\begingroup | 
         | 
  4761   % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end copying'.  | 
         | 
  4762   % \ is the escape char in this texinfo.tex file, so it is the  | 
         | 
  4763   % delimiter for the command; @ will be the escape char when we read  | 
         | 
  4764   % it, but that doesn't matter.  | 
         | 
  4765   \long\def\docopying##1\end copying{\gdef\copyingtext{##1}\enddocopying}% | 
         | 
  4766   %  | 
         | 
  4767   % We must preserve ^^M's in the input file; see \insertcopying below.  | 
         | 
  4768   \catcode`\^^M = \active  | 
         | 
  4769   \docopying  | 
         | 
  4770 }  | 
         | 
  4771   | 
         | 
  4772 % What we do to finish off the copying text.  | 
         | 
  4773 %  | 
         | 
  4774 \def\enddocopying{\endgroup\ignorespaces} | 
         | 
  4775   | 
         | 
  4776 % @insertcopying.  Here we must play games with ^^M's.  On the one hand,  | 
         | 
  4777 % we need them to delimit commands such as `@end quotation', so they  | 
         | 
  4778 % must be active.  On the other hand, we certainly don't want every  | 
         | 
  4779 % end-of-line to be a \par, as would happen with the normal active  | 
         | 
  4780 % definition of ^^M.  On the third hand, two ^^M's in a row should still  | 
         | 
  4781 % generate a \par.  | 
         | 
  4782 %  | 
         | 
  4783 % Our approach is to make ^^M insert a space and a penalty1 normally;  | 
         | 
  4784 % then it can also check if \lastpenalty=1.  If it does, then manually  | 
         | 
  4785 % do \par.  | 
         | 
  4786 %  | 
         | 
  4787 % This messes up the normal definitions of @c[omment], so we redefine  | 
         | 
  4788 % it.  Similarly for @ignore.  (These commands are used in the gcc  | 
         | 
  4789 % manual for man page generation.)  | 
         | 
  4790 %  | 
         | 
  4791 % Seems pretty fragile, most line-oriented commands will presumably  | 
         | 
  4792 % fail, but for the limited use of getting the copying text (which  | 
         | 
  4793 % should be quite simple) inserted, we can hope it's ok.  | 
         | 
  4794 %  | 
         | 
  4795 {\catcode`\^^M=\active % | 
         | 
  4796 \gdef\insertcopying{\begingroup % | 
         | 
  4797   \parindent = 0pt  % looks wrong on title page  | 
         | 
  4798   \def^^M{% | 
         | 
  4799     \ifnum \lastpenalty=1 %  | 
         | 
  4800       \par %  | 
         | 
  4801     \else %  | 
         | 
  4802       \space \penalty 1 %  | 
         | 
  4803     \fi %  | 
         | 
  4804   }%  | 
         | 
  4805   %  | 
         | 
  4806   % Fix @c[omment] for catcode 13 ^^M's.  | 
         | 
  4807   \def\c##1^^M{\ignorespaces}% | 
         | 
  4808   \let\comment = \c %  | 
         | 
  4809   %  | 
         | 
  4810   % Don't bother jumping through all the hoops that \doignore does, it  | 
         | 
  4811   % would be very hard since the catcodes are already set.  | 
         | 
  4812   \long\def\ignore##1\end ignore{\ignorespaces}% | 
         | 
  4813   %  | 
         | 
  4814   \copyingtext %  | 
         | 
  4815 \endgroup}%  | 
         | 
  4816 }  | 
         | 
  4817   | 
         | 
  4818 \message{defuns,} | 
         | 
  4819 % @defun etc.  | 
         | 
  4820   | 
         | 
  4821 % Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally  | 
         | 
  4822 \def\setdeffont#1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname} | 
         | 
  4823   | 
         | 
  4824 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in  | 
         | 
  4825 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt  | 
         | 
  4826 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt  | 
         | 
  4827   | 
         | 
  4828 \newcount\parencount  | 
         | 
  4829   | 
         | 
  4830 % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.  | 
         | 
  4831 %  | 
         | 
  4832 \def\activeparens{% | 
         | 
  4833   \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active  | 
         | 
  4834   \catcode`\&=\active  | 
         | 
  4835   \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active  | 
         | 
  4836 }  | 
         | 
  4837   | 
         | 
  4838 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.  | 
         | 
  4839 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )  | 
         | 
  4840   | 
         | 
  4841 {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm) | 
         | 
  4842   | 
         | 
  4843 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example, | 
         | 
  4844 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,  | 
         | 
  4845 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.  | 
         | 
  4846 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen  | 
         | 
  4847 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack  | 
         | 
  4848   | 
         | 
  4849 \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 } | 
         | 
  4850 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} | 
         | 
  4851 % This is used to turn on special parens  | 
         | 
  4852 % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).  | 
         | 
  4853 \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr} | 
         | 
  4854   | 
         | 
  4855 % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.  | 
         | 
  4856 % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.  | 
         | 
  4857 \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested | 
         | 
  4858   \global\advance\parencount by 1  | 
         | 
  4859 }  | 
         | 
  4860 %  | 
         | 
  4861 % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.  | 
         | 
  4862 \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 } | 
         | 
  4863 %  | 
         | 
  4864 \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0. | 
         | 
  4865   % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.  | 
         | 
  4866   \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi | 
         | 
  4867   \global\advance \parencount by -1 }  | 
         | 
  4868 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards  | 
         | 
  4869 \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ } | 
         | 
  4870 %  | 
         | 
  4871 \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr} | 
         | 
  4872 } % End of definition inside \activeparens  | 
         | 
  4873 %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the  | 
         | 
  4874 %% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]  | 
         | 
  4875 \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 } | 
         | 
  4876 \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 } | 
         | 
  4877 \let\ampnr = \&  | 
         | 
  4878 \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}} | 
         | 
  4879 \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}} | 
         | 
  4880   | 
         | 
  4881 % Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.  | 
         | 
  4882 { | 
         | 
  4883   \catcode`& = \active  | 
         | 
  4884   \global\let& = \ampnr  | 
         | 
  4885 }  | 
         | 
  4886   | 
         | 
  4887 % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).  | 
         | 
  4888 % #1 is the function name.  | 
         | 
  4889 % #2 is the type of definition, such as "Function".  | 
         | 
  4890 %  | 
         | 
  4891 \def\defname#1#2{% | 
         | 
  4892   % How we'll output the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps  | 
         | 
  4893   % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line  | 
         | 
  4894   % just below it.  | 
         | 
  4895   \ifempty{#2}% | 
         | 
  4896     \def\defnametype{}% | 
         | 
  4897   \else  | 
         | 
  4898     \def\defnametype{[\rm #2]}% | 
         | 
  4899   \fi  | 
         | 
  4900   %  | 
         | 
  4901   % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...  | 
         | 
  4902   \dimen2=\leftskip  | 
         | 
  4903   \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent  | 
         | 
  4904   %  | 
         | 
  4905   % Figure out values for the paragraph shape.  | 
         | 
  4906   \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\defnametype}}% | 
         | 
  4907   \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0  % compute size for first line  | 
         | 
  4908   \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent  % size for continuations  | 
         | 
  4909   \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1  | 
         | 
  4910   %  | 
         | 
  4911   % Output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) but stuck inside a box of | 
         | 
  4912   % width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking.  | 
         | 
  4913   \noindent  | 
         | 
  4914   %  | 
         | 
  4915   {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins, | 
         | 
  4916    % so that \rightline will obey them.  | 
         | 
  4917    \advance \hsize by -\dimen2  | 
         | 
  4918    \dimen3 = 0pt  % was -1.25pc  | 
         | 
  4919    \rlap{\rightline{\defnametype\kern\dimen3}}% | 
         | 
  4920   }%  | 
         | 
  4921   %  | 
         | 
  4922   % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:  | 
         | 
  4923   \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000  | 
         | 
  4924   \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent  | 
         | 
  4925   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent  | 
         | 
  4926   {\df #1}\enskip        % output function name | 
         | 
  4927   % \defunargs will be called next to output the arguments, if any.  | 
         | 
  4928 }  | 
         | 
  4929   | 
         | 
  4930 % Common pieces to start any @def...  | 
         | 
  4931 % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).  | 
         | 
  4932 % #2 is the \...x control sequence (which our caller defines).  | 
         | 
  4933 % #3 is the control sequence to process the header, such as \defunheader.  | 
         | 
  4934 %  | 
         | 
  4935 \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  4936   \begingroup\inENV  | 
         | 
  4937   % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,  | 
         | 
  4938   % which is there to keep the function description together with its  | 
         | 
  4939   % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we want to allow a  | 
         | 
  4940   % break after all.  Check for penalty 10002 (inserted by  | 
         | 
  4941   % \defargscommonending) instead of 10000, since the sectioning  | 
         | 
  4942   % commands insert a \penalty10000, and we don't want to allow a break  | 
         | 
  4943   % between a section heading and a defun.  | 
         | 
  4944   \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty0 \fi  | 
         | 
  4945   \medbreak  | 
         | 
  4946   %  | 
         | 
  4947   % Define the \E... end token that this defining construct specifies  | 
         | 
  4948   % so that it will exit this group.  | 
         | 
  4949   \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% | 
         | 
  4950   %  | 
         | 
  4951   \parindent=0in  | 
         | 
  4952   \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent  | 
         | 
  4953   \exdentamount=\defbodyindent  | 
         | 
  4954 }  | 
         | 
  4955   | 
         | 
  4956 % Common part of the \...x definitions.  | 
         | 
  4957 %  | 
         | 
  4958 \def\defxbodycommon{% | 
         | 
  4959   % As with \parsebodycommon above, allow line break if we have multiple  | 
         | 
  4960   % x headers in a row.  It's not a great place, though.  | 
         | 
  4961   \ifnum\lastpenalty=10000 \penalty1000 \fi  | 
         | 
  4962   %  | 
         | 
  4963   \begingroup\obeylines  | 
         | 
  4964 }  | 
         | 
  4965   | 
         | 
  4966 % Process body of @defun, @deffn, @defmac, etc.  | 
         | 
  4967 %  | 
         | 
  4968 \def\defparsebody#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  4969   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% | 
         | 
  4970   \def#2{\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit#3}% | 
         | 
  4971   \catcode\equalChar=\active  | 
         | 
  4972   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens  | 
         | 
  4973   \spacesplit#3%  | 
         | 
  4974 }  | 
         | 
  4975   | 
         | 
  4976 % #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \parsebodycommon above).  | 
         | 
  4977 % #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.  | 
         | 
  4978 %  | 
         | 
  4979 \def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {% | 
         | 
  4980   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% | 
         | 
  4981   \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% | 
         | 
  4982   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens  | 
         | 
  4983   % The \empty here prevents misinterpretation of a construct such as  | 
         | 
  4984   %   @deffn {whatever} {Enharmonic comma} | 
         | 
  4985   % See comments at \deftpparsebody, although in our case we don't have  | 
         | 
  4986   % to remove the \empty afterwards, since it is empty.  | 
         | 
  4987   \spacesplit{#3{#4}}\empty | 
         | 
  4988 }  | 
         | 
  4989   | 
         | 
  4990 % Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.  | 
         | 
  4991 % #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).  | 
         | 
  4992 % #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.  | 
         | 
  4993 % #5 is the method's return type.  | 
         | 
  4994 %  | 
         | 
  4995 \def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {% | 
         | 
  4996   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% | 
         | 
  4997   \def#2##1 ##2 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}% | 
         | 
  4998   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens  | 
         | 
  4999   \spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}% | 
         | 
  5000 }  | 
         | 
  5001   | 
         | 
  5002 % Used for @deftypeop.  The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an  | 
         | 
  5003 % extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it  | 
         | 
  5004 % being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'.  We have  | 
         | 
  5005 % to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the  | 
         | 
  5006 % input at hand.  Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for  | 
         | 
  5007 % the \E... definition to assign the category name to.  | 
         | 
  5008 %  | 
         | 
  5009 \def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {% | 
         | 
  5010   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% | 
         | 
  5011   \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {\def#4{##1}% | 
         | 
  5012     \defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}% | 
         | 
  5013   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens  | 
         | 
  5014   \spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}% | 
         | 
  5015 }  | 
         | 
  5016   | 
         | 
  5017 % For @defop.  | 
         | 
  5018 \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {% | 
         | 
  5019   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% | 
         | 
  5020   \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% | 
         | 
  5021     \defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% | 
         | 
  5022   \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens  | 
         | 
  5023   \spacesplit{#3{#5}}% | 
         | 
  5024 }  | 
         | 
  5025   | 
         | 
  5026 % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones  | 
         | 
  5027 % except that they do not make parens into active characters.  | 
         | 
  5028 % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.  | 
         | 
  5029 %  | 
         | 
  5030 \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  5031   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% | 
         | 
  5032   \def#2{\defxbodycommon \spacesplit#3}% | 
         | 
  5033   \catcode\equalChar=\active  | 
         | 
  5034   \begingroup\obeylines  | 
         | 
  5035   \spacesplit#3%  | 
         | 
  5036 }  | 
         | 
  5037   | 
         | 
  5038 % @defopvar.  | 
         | 
  5039 \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {% | 
         | 
  5040   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% | 
         | 
  5041   \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% | 
         | 
  5042     \defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% | 
         | 
  5043   \begingroup\obeylines  | 
         | 
  5044   \spacesplit{#3{#5}}% | 
         | 
  5045 }  | 
         | 
  5046   | 
         | 
  5047 \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {% | 
         | 
  5048   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% | 
         | 
  5049   \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% | 
         | 
  5050   \begingroup\obeylines  | 
         | 
  5051   \spacesplit{#3{#4}}% | 
         | 
  5052 }  | 
         | 
  5053   | 
         | 
  5054 % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the | 
         | 
  5055 % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct | 
         | 
  5056 % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.  | 
         | 
  5057 % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody  | 
         | 
  5058 %  | 
         | 
  5059 % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That  | 
         | 
  5060 % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and | 
         | 
  5061 % won't strip off the braces.  | 
         | 
  5062 %  | 
         | 
  5063 \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {% | 
         | 
  5064   \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% | 
         | 
  5065   \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% | 
         | 
  5066   \begingroup\obeylines  | 
         | 
  5067   \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty | 
         | 
  5068 }  | 
         | 
  5069   | 
         | 
  5070 % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the  | 
         | 
  5071 % braces (if any).  That's what this does.  | 
         | 
  5072 %  | 
         | 
  5073 \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1} | 
         | 
  5074   | 
         | 
  5075 % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final  | 
         | 
  5076 % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3  | 
         | 
  5077 % (which might be empty) the arguments.  | 
         | 
  5078 %  | 
         | 
  5079 \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  5080   #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}% | 
         | 
  5081 }%  | 
         | 
  5082   | 
         | 
  5083 % Split up #2 (the rest of the input line) at the first space token.  | 
         | 
  5084 % call #1 with two arguments:  | 
         | 
  5085 %  the first is all of #2 before the space token,  | 
         | 
  5086 %  the second is all of #2 after that space token.  | 
         | 
  5087 % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg  | 
         | 
  5088 % and the second is passed as empty.  | 
         | 
  5089 %  | 
         | 
  5090 {\obeylines % | 
         | 
  5091  \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitx{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitx}% | 
         | 
  5092  \long\gdef\spacesplitx#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitx{% | 
         | 
  5093    \ifx\relax #3%  | 
         | 
  5094      #1{#2}{}% | 
         | 
  5095    \else %  | 
         | 
  5096      #1{#2}{#3#4}% | 
         | 
  5097    \fi}%  | 
         | 
  5098 }  | 
         | 
  5099   | 
         | 
  5100 % Define @defun.  | 
         | 
  5101   | 
         | 
  5102 % This is called to end the arguments processing for all the @def... commands.  | 
         | 
  5103 %  | 
         | 
  5104 \def\defargscommonending{% | 
         | 
  5105   \interlinepenalty = 10000  | 
         | 
  5106   \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil  | 
         | 
  5107   \endgraf  | 
         | 
  5108   \nobreak\vskip -\parskip  | 
         | 
  5109   \penalty 10002  % signal to \parsebodycommon.  | 
         | 
  5110 }  | 
         | 
  5111   | 
         | 
  5112 % This expands the args and terminates the paragraph they comprise.  | 
         | 
  5113 %  | 
         | 
  5114 \def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl | 
         | 
  5115 % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.  | 
         | 
  5116 % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.  | 
         | 
  5117 % Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.  | 
         | 
  5118 {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}% | 
         | 
  5119 #1%  | 
         | 
  5120 {\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}% | 
         | 
  5121 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi% | 
         | 
  5122   \defargscommonending  | 
         | 
  5123 }  | 
         | 
  5124   | 
         | 
  5125 \def\deftypefunargs #1{% | 
         | 
  5126 % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.  | 
         | 
  5127 % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.  | 
         | 
  5128 % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.  | 
         | 
  5129 \boldbraxnoamp  | 
         | 
  5130 \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars | 
         | 
  5131   \defargscommonending  | 
         | 
  5132 }  | 
         | 
  5133   | 
         | 
  5134 % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.  | 
         | 
  5135   | 
         | 
  5136 % @deffn Command forward-char nchars  | 
         | 
  5137   | 
         | 
  5138 \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader} | 
         | 
  5139   | 
         | 
  5140 \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% | 
         | 
  5141 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup % | 
         | 
  5142 \catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody  | 
         | 
  5143 }  | 
         | 
  5144   | 
         | 
  5145 % @defun == @deffn Function  | 
         | 
  5146   | 
         | 
  5147 \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader} | 
         | 
  5148   | 
         | 
  5149 \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index | 
         | 
  5150 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}% | 
         | 
  5151 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % | 
         | 
  5152 \catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody  | 
         | 
  5153 }  | 
         | 
  5154   | 
         | 
  5155 % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) | 
         | 
  5156   | 
         | 
  5157 \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader} | 
         | 
  5158   | 
         | 
  5159 % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.  | 
         | 
  5160 \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax} | 
         | 
  5161 % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.  | 
         | 
  5162 \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{% | 
         | 
  5163 \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index | 
         | 
  5164 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}% | 
         | 
  5165 \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup % | 
         | 
  5166 \catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody  | 
         | 
  5167 }  | 
         | 
  5168   | 
         | 
  5169 % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) | 
         | 
  5170   | 
         | 
  5171 \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader} | 
         | 
  5172   | 
         | 
  5173 % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$  | 
         | 
  5174 % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.  | 
         | 
  5175 \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi} | 
         | 
  5176   | 
         | 
  5177 % #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.  | 
         | 
  5178 \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax} | 
         | 
  5179 % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.  | 
         | 
  5180 \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{% | 
         | 
  5181 \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index | 
         | 
  5182 \begingroup  | 
         | 
  5183 \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents  | 
         | 
  5184 %               at least some C++ text from working  | 
         | 
  5185 \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}% | 
         | 
  5186 \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup % | 
         | 
  5187 \catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody  | 
         | 
  5188 }  | 
         | 
  5189   | 
         | 
  5190 % @defmac == @deffn Macro  | 
         | 
  5191   | 
         | 
  5192 \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader} | 
         | 
  5193   | 
         | 
  5194 \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index | 
         | 
  5195 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}% | 
         | 
  5196 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % | 
         | 
  5197 \catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody  | 
         | 
  5198 }  | 
         | 
  5199   | 
         | 
  5200 % @defspec == @deffn Special Form  | 
         | 
  5201   | 
         | 
  5202 \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader} | 
         | 
  5203   | 
         | 
  5204 \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index | 
         | 
  5205 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}% | 
         | 
  5206 \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % | 
         | 
  5207 \catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody  | 
         | 
  5208 }  | 
         | 
  5209   | 
         | 
  5210 % @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...  | 
         | 
  5211 %  | 
         | 
  5212 \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}% | 
         | 
  5213 \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}  | 
         | 
  5214 %  | 
         | 
  5215 \def\defopheader#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  5216   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% function index entry | 
         | 
  5217   \begingroup  | 
         | 
  5218     \defname{#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}% | 
         | 
  5219     \defunargs{#3}% | 
         | 
  5220   \endgroup  | 
         | 
  5221 }  | 
         | 
  5222   | 
         | 
  5223 % @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...  | 
         | 
  5224 %  | 
         | 
  5225 \def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}% | 
         | 
  5226   \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader  | 
         | 
  5227                        \deftypeopcategory}  | 
         | 
  5228 %  | 
         | 
  5229 % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.  | 
         | 
  5230 \def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{% | 
         | 
  5231   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index | 
         | 
  5232   \begingroup  | 
         | 
  5233     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3} | 
         | 
  5234             {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}% | 
         | 
  5235     \deftypefunargs{#4}% | 
         | 
  5236   \endgroup  | 
         | 
  5237 }  | 
         | 
  5238   | 
         | 
  5239 % @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...  | 
         | 
  5240 %  | 
         | 
  5241 \def\deftypemethod{% | 
         | 
  5242   \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}  | 
         | 
  5243 %  | 
         | 
  5244 % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.  | 
         | 
  5245 \def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{% | 
         | 
  5246   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index | 
         | 
  5247   \begingroup  | 
         | 
  5248     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}% | 
         | 
  5249     \deftypefunargs{#4}% | 
         | 
  5250   \endgroup  | 
         | 
  5251 }  | 
         | 
  5252   | 
         | 
  5253 % @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME  | 
         | 
  5254 %  | 
         | 
  5255 \def\deftypeivar{% | 
         | 
  5256   \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}  | 
         | 
  5257 %  | 
         | 
  5258 % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.  | 
         | 
  5259 \def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  5260   \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index | 
         | 
  5261   \begingroup  | 
         | 
  5262     \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3} | 
         | 
  5263             {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}% | 
         | 
  5264     \defvarargs{#3}% | 
         | 
  5265   \endgroup  | 
         | 
  5266 }  | 
         | 
  5267   | 
         | 
  5268 % @defmethod == @defop Method  | 
         | 
  5269 %  | 
         | 
  5270 \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader} | 
         | 
  5271 %  | 
         | 
  5272 % #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.  | 
         | 
  5273 \def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  5274   \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index | 
         | 
  5275   \begingroup  | 
         | 
  5276     \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}% | 
         | 
  5277     \defunargs{#3}% | 
         | 
  5278   \endgroup  | 
         | 
  5279 }  | 
         | 
  5280   | 
         | 
  5281 % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag | 
         | 
  5282   | 
         | 
  5283 \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}% | 
         | 
  5284 \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}  | 
         | 
  5285   | 
         | 
  5286 \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  5287   \dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% variable index entry | 
         | 
  5288   \begingroup  | 
         | 
  5289     \defname{#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}% | 
         | 
  5290     \defvarargs{#3}% | 
         | 
  5291   \endgroup  | 
         | 
  5292 }  | 
         | 
  5293   | 
         | 
  5294 % @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME | 
         | 
  5295 %  | 
         | 
  5296 \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader} | 
         | 
  5297 %  | 
         | 
  5298 \def\defivarheader#1#2#3{% | 
         | 
  5299   \dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in var index | 
         | 
  5300   \begingroup  | 
         | 
  5301     \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}% | 
         | 
  5302     \defvarargs{#3}% | 
         | 
  5303   \endgroup  | 
         | 
  5304 }  | 
         | 
  5305   | 
         | 
  5306 % @defvar  | 
         | 
  5307 % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.  | 
         | 
  5308 % This is actually simple: just print them in roman.  | 
         | 
  5309 % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up  | 
         | 
  5310 \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1% | 
         | 
  5311   \defargscommonending  | 
         | 
  5312 }  | 
         | 
  5313   | 
         | 
  5314 % @defvr Counter foo-count  | 
         | 
  5315   | 
         | 
  5316 \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader} | 
         | 
  5317   | 
         | 
  5318 \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}% | 
         | 
  5319 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup} | 
         | 
  5320   | 
         | 
  5321 % @defvar == @defvr Variable  | 
         | 
  5322   | 
         | 
  5323 \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader} | 
         | 
  5324   | 
         | 
  5325 \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index | 
         | 
  5326 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}% | 
         | 
  5327 \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % | 
         | 
  5328 }  | 
         | 
  5329   | 
         | 
  5330 % @defopt == @defvr {User Option} | 
         | 
  5331   | 
         | 
  5332 \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader} | 
         | 
  5333   | 
         | 
  5334 \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index | 
         | 
  5335 \begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}% | 
         | 
  5336 \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % | 
         | 
  5337 }  | 
         | 
  5338   | 
         | 
  5339 % @deftypevar int foobar  | 
         | 
  5340   | 
         | 
  5341 \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader} | 
         | 
  5342   | 
         | 
  5343 % #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that  | 
         | 
  5344 % is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.  | 
         | 
  5345 \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{% | 
         | 
  5346 \dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index  | 
         | 
  5347 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}% | 
         | 
  5348   \defargscommonending  | 
         | 
  5349 \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  5350 \def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}} | 
         | 
  5351   | 
         | 
  5352 % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable | 
         | 
  5353   | 
         | 
  5354 \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader} | 
         | 
  5355   | 
         | 
  5356 \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax% | 
         | 
  5357 \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1} | 
         | 
  5358   \defargscommonending  | 
         | 
  5359 \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  5360   | 
         | 
  5361 % Now define @deftp  | 
         | 
  5362 % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.  | 
         | 
  5363   | 
         | 
  5364 \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}} | 
         | 
  5365   | 
         | 
  5366 % @deftp Class window height width ...  | 
         | 
  5367   | 
         | 
  5368 \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader} | 
         | 
  5369   | 
         | 
  5370 \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}% | 
         | 
  5371 \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup} | 
         | 
  5372   | 
         | 
  5373 % These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)  | 
         | 
  5374 % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.  | 
         | 
  5375 %  | 
         | 
  5376 \def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5377 \def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5378 \def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5379 \def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5380 \def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5381 \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5382 \def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5383 \def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5384 \def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5385 \def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5386 \def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5387 \def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5388 \def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5389 \def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5390 \def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5391 \def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5392 \def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5393 \def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5394 \def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}} | 
         | 
  5395   | 
         | 
  5396   | 
         | 
  5397 \message{macros,} | 
         | 
  5398 % @macro.  | 
         | 
  5399   | 
         | 
  5400 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,  | 
         | 
  5401 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.  | 
         | 
  5402 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined  | 
         | 
  5403  \newwrite\macscribble  | 
         | 
  5404  \def\scanmacro#1{% | 
         | 
  5405    \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M  | 
         | 
  5406    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex  | 
         | 
  5407    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@  | 
         | 
  5408    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.  | 
         | 
  5409    \toks0={#1\endinput}% | 
         | 
  5410    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp  | 
         | 
  5411    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% | 
         | 
  5412    \immediate\closeout\macscribble  | 
         | 
  5413    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces  | 
         | 
  5414    \input \jobname.tmp  | 
         | 
  5415    \endgroup  | 
         | 
  5416 }  | 
         | 
  5417 \else  | 
         | 
  5418 \def\scanmacro#1{% | 
         | 
  5419 \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M  | 
         | 
  5420 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex  | 
         | 
  5421 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@  | 
         | 
  5422 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup} | 
         | 
  5423 \fi  | 
         | 
  5424   | 
         | 
  5425 \newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters  | 
         | 
  5426 \newtoks\macname    % Macro name  | 
         | 
  5427 \newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?  | 
         | 
  5428 \def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form | 
         | 
  5429                     % \do\macro1\do\macro2...  | 
         | 
  5430   | 
         | 
  5431 % Utility routines.  | 
         | 
  5432 % Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.  | 
         | 
  5433 \def\cslet#1#2{% | 
         | 
  5434 \expandafter\expandafter  | 
         | 
  5435 \expandafter\let  | 
         | 
  5436 \expandafter\expandafter  | 
         | 
  5437 \csname#1\endcsname  | 
         | 
  5438 \csname#2\endcsname}  | 
         | 
  5439   | 
         | 
  5440 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.  | 
         | 
  5441 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).  | 
         | 
  5442 {\catcode`\@=11 | 
         | 
  5443 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} | 
         | 
  5444 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} | 
         | 
  5445 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} | 
         | 
  5446 \def\unbrace#1{#1} | 
         | 
  5447 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} | 
         | 
  5448 }  | 
         | 
  5449   | 
         | 
  5450 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.  | 
         | 
  5451 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% | 
         | 
  5452 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% | 
         | 
  5453 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% | 
         | 
  5454 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% | 
         | 
  5455 }  | 
         | 
  5456   | 
         | 
  5457 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where  | 
         | 
  5458 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active  | 
         | 
  5459 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.  | 
         | 
  5460   | 
         | 
  5461 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is  | 
         | 
  5462 % done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro  | 
         | 
  5463 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.  | 
         | 
  5464   | 
         | 
  5465 \def\macrobodyctxt{% | 
         | 
  5466   \catcode`\~=\other  | 
         | 
  5467   \catcode`\^=\other  | 
         | 
  5468   \catcode`\_=\other  | 
         | 
  5469   \catcode`\|=\other  | 
         | 
  5470   \catcode`\<=\other  | 
         | 
  5471   \catcode`\>=\other  | 
         | 
  5472   \catcode`\+=\other  | 
         | 
  5473   \catcode`\{=\other | 
         | 
  5474   \catcode`\}=\other  | 
         | 
  5475   \catcode`\@=\other  | 
         | 
  5476   \catcode`\^^M=\other  | 
         | 
  5477   \usembodybackslash}  | 
         | 
  5478   | 
         | 
  5479 \def\macroargctxt{% | 
         | 
  5480   \catcode`\~=\other  | 
         | 
  5481   \catcode`\^=\other  | 
         | 
  5482   \catcode`\_=\other  | 
         | 
  5483   \catcode`\|=\other  | 
         | 
  5484   \catcode`\<=\other  | 
         | 
  5485   \catcode`\>=\other  | 
         | 
  5486   \catcode`\+=\other  | 
         | 
  5487   \catcode`\@=\other  | 
         | 
  5488   \catcode`\\=\other}  | 
         | 
  5489   | 
         | 
  5490 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.  | 
         | 
  5491 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N  | 
         | 
  5492 % where N is the macro parameter number.  | 
         | 
  5493 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so  | 
         | 
  5494 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.  | 
         | 
  5495   | 
         | 
  5496 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active | 
         | 
  5497  @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} | 
         | 
  5498  @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} | 
         | 
  5499 }  | 
         | 
  5500 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} | 
         | 
  5501   | 
         | 
  5502 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} | 
         | 
  5503 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} | 
         | 
  5504   | 
         | 
  5505 \def\macroxxx#1{% | 
         | 
  5506   \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist | 
         | 
  5507   \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments  | 
         | 
  5508      \paramno=0%  | 
         | 
  5509   \else  | 
         | 
  5510      \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%  | 
         | 
  5511   \fi  | 
         | 
  5512   \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname  | 
         | 
  5513      \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% | 
         | 
  5514   \else  | 
         | 
  5515      \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax  | 
         | 
  5516      \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi | 
         | 
  5517      \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% | 
         | 
  5518      \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%  | 
         | 
  5519      % Add the macroname to \macrolist  | 
         | 
  5520      \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}% | 
         | 
  5521      \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0 | 
         | 
  5522        \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%  | 
         | 
  5523   \fi  | 
         | 
  5524   \begingroup \macrobodyctxt  | 
         | 
  5525   \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody  | 
         | 
  5526   \else \expandafter\parsemacbody  | 
         | 
  5527   \fi}  | 
         | 
  5528   | 
         | 
  5529 \def\unmacro{\parsearg\dounmacro} | 
         | 
  5530 \def\dounmacro#1{% | 
         | 
  5531   \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname  | 
         | 
  5532     \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% | 
         | 
  5533     \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%  | 
         | 
  5534     % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:  | 
         | 
  5535     \begingroup  | 
         | 
  5536       \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax  | 
         | 
  5537       \let\do\unmacrodo  | 
         | 
  5538       \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% | 
         | 
  5539     \endgroup  | 
         | 
  5540   \else  | 
         | 
  5541     \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% | 
         | 
  5542   \fi  | 
         | 
  5543 }  | 
         | 
  5544   | 
         | 
  5545 % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any  | 
         | 
  5546 % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.  | 
         | 
  5547 %  | 
         | 
  5548 \def\unmacrodo#1{% | 
         | 
  5549   \ifx#1\relax  | 
         | 
  5550     % remove this  | 
         | 
  5551   \else  | 
         | 
  5552     \noexpand\do \noexpand #1%  | 
         | 
  5553   \fi  | 
         | 
  5554 }  | 
         | 
  5555   | 
         | 
  5556 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a  | 
         | 
  5557 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by  | 
         | 
  5558 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.  | 
         | 
  5559 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} | 
         | 
  5560 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} | 
         | 
  5561 \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} | 
         | 
  5562 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} | 
         | 
  5563   | 
         | 
  5564 % Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist | 
         | 
  5565 % so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah  | 
         | 
  5566 % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.  | 
         | 
  5567 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).  | 
         | 
  5568   | 
         | 
  5569 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.  | 
         | 
  5570 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something  | 
         | 
  5571 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine  | 
         | 
  5572 % it to # just before using the token list produced.  | 
         | 
  5573 %  | 
         | 
  5574 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before  | 
         | 
  5575 % the macro is used.  | 
         | 
  5576   | 
         | 
  5577 \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% | 
         | 
  5578         \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}  | 
         | 
  5579 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% | 
         | 
  5580   \if#1;\let\next=\relax  | 
         | 
  5581   \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx  | 
         | 
  5582     \advance\paramno by 1%  | 
         | 
  5583     \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname | 
         | 
  5584         {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% | 
         | 
  5585     \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% | 
         | 
  5586   \fi\next}  | 
         | 
  5587   | 
         | 
  5588 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.  | 
         | 
  5589 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)  | 
         | 
  5590   | 
         | 
  5591 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%  | 
         | 
  5592 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | 
         | 
  5593 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%  | 
         | 
  5594 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | 
         | 
  5595   | 
         | 
  5596 % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and  | 
         | 
  5597 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.  | 
         | 
  5598 % Much magic with \expandafter here.  | 
         | 
  5599 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file  | 
         | 
  5600 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.  | 
         | 
  5601 \def\defmacro{% | 
         | 
  5602   \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars  | 
         | 
  5603   \ifrecursive  | 
         | 
  5604     \ifcase\paramno  | 
         | 
  5605     % 0  | 
         | 
  5606       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
         | 
  5607         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | 
         | 
  5608     \or % 1  | 
         | 
  5609       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
         | 
  5610          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt  | 
         | 
  5611          \noexpand\braceorline  | 
         | 
  5612          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%  | 
         | 
  5613       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | 
         | 
  5614          \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | 
         | 
  5615     \else % many  | 
         | 
  5616       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
         | 
  5617          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt  | 
         | 
  5618          \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%  | 
         | 
  5619       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | 
         | 
  5620           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%  | 
         | 
  5621       \expandafter\expandafter  | 
         | 
  5622       \expandafter\xdef  | 
         | 
  5623       \expandafter\expandafter  | 
         | 
  5624         \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname  | 
         | 
  5625           \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | 
         | 
  5626     \fi  | 
         | 
  5627   \else  | 
         | 
  5628     \ifcase\paramno  | 
         | 
  5629     % 0  | 
         | 
  5630       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
         | 
  5631         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | 
         | 
  5632         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | 
         | 
  5633     \or % 1  | 
         | 
  5634       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
         | 
  5635          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt  | 
         | 
  5636          \noexpand\braceorline  | 
         | 
  5637          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%  | 
         | 
  5638       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | 
         | 
  5639         \egroup  | 
         | 
  5640         \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | 
         | 
  5641         \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | 
         | 
  5642     \else % many  | 
         | 
  5643       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | 
         | 
  5644          \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt  | 
         | 
  5645          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%  | 
         | 
  5646       \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | 
         | 
  5647           \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%  | 
         | 
  5648       \expandafter\expandafter  | 
         | 
  5649       \expandafter\xdef  | 
         | 
  5650       \expandafter\expandafter  | 
         | 
  5651       \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname  | 
         | 
  5652       \paramlist{% | 
         | 
  5653           \egroup  | 
         | 
  5654           \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | 
         | 
  5655           \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | 
         | 
  5656     \fi  | 
         | 
  5657   \fi}  | 
         | 
  5658   | 
         | 
  5659 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} | 
         | 
  5660   | 
         | 
  5661 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a  | 
         | 
  5662 % {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole | 
         | 
  5663 % line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence  | 
         | 
  5664 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)  | 
         | 
  5665 \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} | 
         | 
  5666 \def\braceorlinexxx{% | 
         | 
  5667   \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else  | 
         | 
  5668     \expandafter\parsearg  | 
         | 
  5669   \fi \next}  | 
         | 
  5670   | 
         | 
  5671 % We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not  | 
         | 
  5672 % expanded by \write.  | 
         | 
  5673 \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}% | 
         | 
  5674   \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next} | 
         | 
  5675   | 
         | 
  5676   | 
         | 
  5677 % @alias.  | 
         | 
  5678 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal  | 
         | 
  5679 % sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.  | 
         | 
  5680 \def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx} | 
         | 
  5681 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} | 
         | 
  5682 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces | 
         | 
  5683 \edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=% | 
         | 
  5684            \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%  | 
         | 
  5685 \expandafter\endgroup\next}  | 
         | 
  5686   | 
         | 
  5687   | 
         | 
  5688 \message{cross references,} | 
         | 
  5689 % @xref etc.  | 
         | 
  5690   | 
         | 
  5691 \newwrite\auxfile  | 
         | 
  5692   | 
         | 
  5693 \newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.  | 
         | 
  5694 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.  | 
         | 
  5695   | 
         | 
  5696 % @inforef is relatively simple.  | 
         | 
  5697 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} | 
         | 
  5698 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, | 
         | 
  5699   node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} | 
         | 
  5700   | 
         | 
  5701 % @node's job is to define \lastnode.  | 
         | 
  5702 \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz} | 
         | 
  5703 \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx #1,\finishnodeparse} | 
         | 
  5704 \def\nodexxx#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} | 
         | 
  5705 \let\nwnode=\node  | 
         | 
  5706 \let\lastnode=\relax  | 
         | 
  5707   | 
         | 
  5708 % The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.  | 
         | 
  5709 \def\donoderef{% | 
         | 
  5710   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else  | 
         | 
  5711     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}% | 
         | 
  5712       {Ysectionnumberandtype}% | 
         | 
  5713     \global\let\lastnode=\relax  | 
         | 
  5714   \fi  | 
         | 
  5715 }  | 
         | 
  5716 \def\unnumbnoderef{% | 
         | 
  5717   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else  | 
         | 
  5718     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}% | 
         | 
  5719     \global\let\lastnode=\relax  | 
         | 
  5720   \fi  | 
         | 
  5721 }  | 
         | 
  5722 \def\appendixnoderef{% | 
         | 
  5723   \ifx\lastnode\relax\else  | 
         | 
  5724     \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}% | 
         | 
  5725       {Yappendixletterandtype}% | 
         | 
  5726     \global\let\lastnode=\relax  | 
         | 
  5727   \fi  | 
         | 
  5728 }  | 
         | 
  5729   | 
         | 
  5730   | 
         | 
  5731 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. | 
         | 
  5732 %  | 
         | 
  5733 \newcount\savesfregister  | 
         | 
  5734 \gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} | 
         | 
  5735 \gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} | 
         | 
  5736 \gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} | 
         | 
  5737   | 
         | 
  5738 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an | 
         | 
  5739 % anchor), namely NAME-title (the corresponding @chapter/etc. name),  | 
         | 
  5740 % NAME-pg (the page number), and NAME-snt (section number and type).  | 
         | 
  5741 % Called from \foonoderef.  | 
         | 
  5742 %  | 
         | 
  5743 % We have to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section  | 
         | 
  5744 % title aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in  | 
         | 
  5745 % the first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.  | 
         | 
  5746 %  | 
         | 
  5747 % Likewise, use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore  | 
         | 
  5748 % and backslash work in node names.  | 
         | 
  5749 %  | 
         | 
  5750 \def\setref#1#2{{% | 
         | 
  5751   \atdummies  | 
         | 
  5752   \pdfmkdest{#1}% | 
         | 
  5753   %  | 
         | 
  5754   \turnoffactive  | 
         | 
  5755   \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% | 
         | 
  5756   \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% | 
         | 
  5757   \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}% | 
         | 
  5758 }}  | 
         | 
  5759   | 
         | 
  5760 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is  | 
         | 
  5761 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed  | 
         | 
  5762 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed  | 
         | 
  5763 % manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.  | 
         | 
  5764 %  | 
         | 
  5765 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | 
         | 
  5766 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | 
         | 
  5767 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | 
         | 
  5768 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup | 
         | 
  5769   \unsepspaces  | 
         | 
  5770   \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% | 
         | 
  5771   \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}% | 
         | 
  5772   \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}% | 
         | 
  5773   \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}% | 
         | 
  5774   \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt  | 
         | 
  5775     % No printed node name was explicitly given.  | 
         | 
  5776     \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax  | 
         | 
  5777       % Use the node name inside the square brackets.  | 
         | 
  5778       \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% | 
         | 
  5779     \else  | 
         | 
  5780       % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside  | 
         | 
  5781       % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.  | 
         | 
  5782       \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt  | 
         | 
  5783         % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.  | 
         | 
  5784         \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% | 
         | 
  5785       \else  | 
         | 
  5786         \ifhavexrefs  | 
         | 
  5787           % We know the real title if we have the xref values.  | 
         | 
  5788           \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}% | 
         | 
  5789         \else  | 
         | 
  5790           % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.  | 
         | 
  5791           \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% | 
         | 
  5792         \fi%  | 
         | 
  5793       \fi  | 
         | 
  5794     \fi  | 
         | 
  5795   \fi  | 
         | 
  5796   %  | 
         | 
  5797   % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not  | 
         | 
  5798   % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will  | 
         | 
  5799   % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals  | 
         | 
  5800   % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this  | 
         | 
  5801   % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it  | 
         | 
  5802   % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.  | 
         | 
  5803   \ifpdf  | 
         | 
  5804     \leavevmode  | 
         | 
  5805     \getfilename{#4}% | 
         | 
  5806     {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash | 
         | 
  5807      \ifnum\filenamelength>0  | 
         | 
  5808        \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | 
         | 
  5809          goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}% | 
         | 
  5810      \else  | 
         | 
  5811        \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | 
         | 
  5812          goto name{#1}% | 
         | 
  5813      \fi  | 
         | 
  5814     }%  | 
         | 
  5815     \linkcolor  | 
         | 
  5816   \fi  | 
         | 
  5817   %  | 
         | 
  5818   \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt  | 
         | 
  5819     \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | 
         | 
  5820   \else  | 
         | 
  5821     % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the  | 
         | 
  5822     % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand  | 
         | 
  5823     % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of  | 
         | 
  5824     % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the  | 
         | 
  5825     % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.  | 
         | 
  5826     {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash | 
         | 
  5827      % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for  | 
         | 
  5828      % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.  | 
         | 
  5829      \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% | 
         | 
  5830      \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi | 
         | 
  5831     }%  | 
         | 
  5832     % output the `[mynode]' via a macro.  | 
         | 
  5833     \xrefprintnodename\printednodename  | 
         | 
  5834     %  | 
         | 
  5835     % But we always want a comma and a space:  | 
         | 
  5836     ,\space  | 
         | 
  5837     %  | 
         | 
  5838     % output the `page 3'.  | 
         | 
  5839     \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% | 
         | 
  5840   \fi  | 
         | 
  5841   \endlink  | 
         | 
  5842 \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  5843   | 
         | 
  5844 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref  | 
         | 
  5845 % output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,  | 
         | 
  5846 % since not square brackets don't work in some documents.  Particularly  | 
         | 
  5847 % one that Bob is working on :).  | 
         | 
  5848 %  | 
         | 
  5849 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} | 
         | 
  5850   | 
         | 
  5851 % \dosetq is called from \setref to do the actual \write (\iflinks).  | 
         | 
  5852 %  | 
         | 
  5853 \def\dosetq#1#2{% | 
         | 
  5854   {\let\folio=0% | 
         | 
  5855    \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}% | 
         | 
  5856    \iflinks \next \fi  | 
         | 
  5857   }%  | 
         | 
  5858 }  | 
         | 
  5859   | 
         | 
  5860 % \internalsetq{foo}{page} expands into | 
         | 
  5861 %   CHARACTERS @xrdef{foo}{...expansion of \page...} | 
         | 
  5862 \def\internalsetq#1#2{@xrdef{#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}} | 
         | 
  5863   | 
         | 
  5864 % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq.  | 
         | 
  5865 %  | 
         | 
  5866 \def\Ypagenumber{\folio} | 
         | 
  5867 \def\Ytitle{\thissection} | 
         | 
  5868 \def\Ynothing{} | 
         | 
  5869 \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{% | 
         | 
  5870   \ifnum\secno=0  | 
         | 
  5871     \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno  | 
         | 
  5872   \else \ifnum\subsecno=0  | 
         | 
  5873     \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno  | 
         | 
  5874   \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0  | 
         | 
  5875     \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno  | 
         | 
  5876   \else  | 
         | 
  5877     \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno  | 
         | 
  5878   \fi\fi\fi  | 
         | 
  5879 }  | 
         | 
  5880   | 
         | 
  5881 \def\Yappendixletterandtype{% | 
         | 
  5882   \ifnum\secno=0  | 
         | 
  5883      \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% | 
         | 
  5884   \else \ifnum\subsecno=0  | 
         | 
  5885      \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno  | 
         | 
  5886   \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0  | 
         | 
  5887     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno  | 
         | 
  5888   \else  | 
         | 
  5889     \putwordSection@tie  | 
         | 
  5890       @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno  | 
         | 
  5891   \fi\fi\fi  | 
         | 
  5892 }  | 
         | 
  5893   | 
         | 
  5894 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error  | 
         | 
  5895 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  | 
         | 
  5896 %  | 
         | 
  5897 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined  | 
         | 
  5898   \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.  | 
         | 
  5899 \else  | 
         | 
  5900   \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space} | 
         | 
  5901 \fi  | 
         | 
  5902   | 
         | 
  5903 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. | 
         | 
  5904 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.  | 
         | 
  5905 %  | 
         | 
  5906 \def\refx#1#2{% | 
         | 
  5907   {% | 
         | 
  5908     \indexnofonts  | 
         | 
  5909     \otherbackslash  | 
         | 
  5910     \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX  | 
         | 
  5911       \csname X#1\endcsname  | 
         | 
  5912   }%  | 
         | 
  5913   \ifx\thisrefX\relax  | 
         | 
  5914     % If not defined, say something at least.  | 
         | 
  5915     \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright  | 
         | 
  5916     \iflinks  | 
         | 
  5917       \ifhavexrefs  | 
         | 
  5918         \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% | 
         | 
  5919       \else  | 
         | 
  5920         \ifwarnedxrefs\else  | 
         | 
  5921           \global\warnedxrefstrue  | 
         | 
  5922           \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% | 
         | 
  5923         \fi  | 
         | 
  5924       \fi  | 
         | 
  5925     \fi  | 
         | 
  5926   \else  | 
         | 
  5927     % It's defined, so just use it.  | 
         | 
  5928     \thisrefX  | 
         | 
  5929   \fi  | 
         | 
  5930   #2% Output the suffix in any case.  | 
         | 
  5931 }  | 
         | 
  5932   | 
         | 
  5933 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  | 
         | 
  5934 %  | 
         | 
  5935 \def\xrdef#1{\expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname} | 
         | 
  5936   | 
         | 
  5937 % Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.  | 
         | 
  5938 \def\readauxfile{\begingroup | 
         | 
  5939   \catcode`\^^@=\other  | 
         | 
  5940   \catcode`\^^A=\other  | 
         | 
  5941   \catcode`\^^B=\other  | 
         | 
  5942   \catcode`\^^C=\other  | 
         | 
  5943   \catcode`\^^D=\other  | 
         | 
  5944   \catcode`\^^E=\other  | 
         | 
  5945   \catcode`\^^F=\other  | 
         | 
  5946   \catcode`\^^G=\other  | 
         | 
  5947   \catcode`\^^H=\other  | 
         | 
  5948   \catcode`\^^K=\other  | 
         | 
  5949   \catcode`\^^L=\other  | 
         | 
  5950   \catcode`\^^N=\other  | 
         | 
  5951   \catcode`\^^P=\other  | 
         | 
  5952   \catcode`\^^Q=\other  | 
         | 
  5953   \catcode`\^^R=\other  | 
         | 
  5954   \catcode`\^^S=\other  | 
         | 
  5955   \catcode`\^^T=\other  | 
         | 
  5956   \catcode`\^^U=\other  | 
         | 
  5957   \catcode`\^^V=\other  | 
         | 
  5958   \catcode`\^^W=\other  | 
         | 
  5959   \catcode`\^^X=\other  | 
         | 
  5960   \catcode`\^^Z=\other  | 
         | 
  5961   \catcode`\^^[=\other  | 
         | 
  5962   \catcode`\^^\=\other  | 
         | 
  5963   \catcode`\^^]=\other  | 
         | 
  5964   \catcode`\^^^=\other  | 
         | 
  5965   \catcode`\^^_=\other  | 
         | 
  5966   % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.  | 
         | 
  5967   % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't  | 
         | 
  5968   % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,  | 
         | 
  5969   % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^  | 
         | 
  5970   % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat | 
         | 
  5971   % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first | 
         | 
  5972   % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could  | 
         | 
  5973   % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.  | 
         | 
  5974   %  | 
         | 
  5975   % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:  | 
         | 
  5976   % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter | 
         | 
  5977   % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.  | 
         | 
  5978   %  | 
         | 
  5979   \catcode`\^=\other  | 
         | 
  5980   %  | 
         | 
  5981   % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...  | 
         | 
  5982   \catcode`\~=\other  | 
         | 
  5983   \catcode`\[=\other  | 
         | 
  5984   \catcode`\]=\other  | 
         | 
  5985   \catcode`\"=\other  | 
         | 
  5986   \catcode`\_=\other  | 
         | 
  5987   \catcode`\|=\other  | 
         | 
  5988   \catcode`\<=\other  | 
         | 
  5989   \catcode`\>=\other  | 
         | 
  5990   \catcode`\$=\other  | 
         | 
  5991   \catcode`\#=\other  | 
         | 
  5992   \catcode`\&=\other  | 
         | 
  5993   \catcode`\%=\other  | 
         | 
  5994   \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off  | 
         | 
  5995   %  | 
         | 
  5996   % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters  | 
         | 
  5997   {% | 
         | 
  5998     \count 1=128  | 
         | 
  5999     \def\loop{% | 
         | 
  6000       \catcode\count 1=\other  | 
         | 
  6001       \advance\count 1 by 1  | 
         | 
  6002       \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi  | 
         | 
  6003     }%  | 
         | 
  6004   }%  | 
         | 
  6005   %  | 
         | 
  6006   % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on  | 
         | 
  6007   % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.  | 
         | 
  6008   % For example, @xrdef{$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^ | 
         | 
  6009   % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,  | 
         | 
  6010   % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.  | 
         | 
  6011   \catcode`\\=\other  | 
         | 
  6012   %  | 
         | 
  6013   % @ is our escape character in .aux files.  | 
         | 
  6014   \catcode`\{=1 | 
         | 
  6015   \catcode`\}=2  | 
         | 
  6016   \catcode`\@=0  | 
         | 
  6017   %  | 
         | 
  6018   \openin 1 \jobname.aux  | 
         | 
  6019   \ifeof 1 \else  | 
         | 
  6020     \closein 1  | 
         | 
  6021     \input \jobname.aux  | 
         | 
  6022     \global\havexrefstrue  | 
         | 
  6023   \fi  | 
         | 
  6024   % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.  | 
         | 
  6025   \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux  | 
         | 
  6026 \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  6027   | 
         | 
  6028   | 
         | 
  6029 % Footnotes.  | 
         | 
  6030   | 
         | 
  6031 \newcount \footnoteno  | 
         | 
  6032   | 
         | 
  6033 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is  | 
         | 
  6034 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a  | 
         | 
  6035 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is  | 
         | 
  6036 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a  | 
         | 
  6037 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)  | 
         | 
  6038 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } | 
         | 
  6039   | 
         | 
  6040 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.  | 
         | 
  6041 \let\footnotestyle=\comment  | 
         | 
  6042   | 
         | 
  6043 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote  | 
         | 
  6044   | 
         | 
  6045 {\catcode `\@=11 | 
         | 
  6046 %  | 
         | 
  6047 % Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.  | 
         | 
  6048 \gdef\footnote{% | 
         | 
  6049   \let\indent=\ptexindent  | 
         | 
  6050   \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne  | 
         | 
  6051   \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% | 
         | 
  6052   %  | 
         | 
  6053   % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the  | 
         | 
  6054   % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.  | 
         | 
  6055   \let\@sf\empty  | 
         | 
  6056   \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi | 
         | 
  6057   %  | 
         | 
  6058   % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.  | 
         | 
  6059   \unskip  | 
         | 
  6060   \thisfootno\@sf  | 
         | 
  6061   \dofootnote  | 
         | 
  6062 }%  | 
         | 
  6063   | 
         | 
  6064 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the  | 
         | 
  6065 % footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.  | 
         | 
  6066 %  | 
         | 
  6067 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses  | 
         | 
  6068 % \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when  | 
         | 
  6069 % the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.  | 
         | 
  6070 %  | 
         | 
  6071 % The start of the footnote looks usually like this:  | 
         | 
  6072 \gdef\startfootins{\insert\footins\bgroup} | 
         | 
  6073 %  | 
         | 
  6074 % ... but this macro is redefined inside @multitable.  | 
         | 
  6075 %  | 
         | 
  6076 \gdef\dofootnote{% | 
         | 
  6077   \startfootins  | 
         | 
  6078   % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the  | 
         | 
  6079   % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.  | 
         | 
  6080   % So reset some parameters.  | 
         | 
  6081   \hsize=\pagewidth  | 
         | 
  6082   \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty  | 
         | 
  6083   \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes  | 
         | 
  6084   \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox  | 
         | 
  6085   \floatingpenalty\@MM  | 
         | 
  6086   \leftskip\z@skip  | 
         | 
  6087   \rightskip\z@skip  | 
         | 
  6088   \spaceskip\z@skip  | 
         | 
  6089   \xspaceskip\z@skip  | 
         | 
  6090   \parindent\defaultparindent  | 
         | 
  6091   %  | 
         | 
  6092   \smallfonts \rm  | 
         | 
  6093   %  | 
         | 
  6094   % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears  | 
         | 
  6095   % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use  | 
         | 
  6096   % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote  | 
         | 
  6097   % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).  | 
         | 
  6098   \let\noindent = \relax  | 
         | 
  6099   %  | 
         | 
  6100   % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the  | 
         | 
  6101   % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.  | 
         | 
  6102   \everypar = {\hang}% | 
         | 
  6103   \textindent{\thisfootno}% | 
         | 
  6104   %  | 
         | 
  6105   % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this  | 
         | 
  6106   % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it  | 
         | 
  6107   % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.  | 
         | 
  6108   \footstrut  | 
         | 
  6109   \futurelet\next\fo@t  | 
         | 
  6110 }  | 
         | 
  6111 }%end \catcode `\@=11  | 
         | 
  6112   | 
         | 
  6113 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should  | 
         | 
  6114 % surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the  | 
         | 
  6115 % change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would  | 
         | 
  6116 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main  | 
         | 
  6117 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).  | 
         | 
  6118 %  | 
         | 
  6119 \def\|{% | 
         | 
  6120   % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.  | 
         | 
  6121   \leavevmode  | 
         | 
  6122   %  | 
         | 
  6123   % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.  | 
         | 
  6124   \vadjust{% | 
         | 
  6125     % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current  | 
         | 
  6126     % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.  | 
         | 
  6127     \vskip-\baselineskip  | 
         | 
  6128     %  | 
         | 
  6129     % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So  | 
         | 
  6130     % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.  | 
         | 
  6131     \llap{% | 
         | 
  6132       %  | 
         | 
  6133       % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.  | 
         | 
  6134       \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt  | 
         | 
  6135       %  | 
         | 
  6136       % This is the space between the bar and the text.  | 
         | 
  6137       \hskip 12pt  | 
         | 
  6138     }%  | 
         | 
  6139   }%  | 
         | 
  6140 }  | 
         | 
  6141   | 
         | 
  6142 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles  | 
         | 
  6143 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided  | 
         | 
  6144 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).  | 
         | 
  6145 %  | 
         | 
  6146 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} | 
         | 
  6147   | 
         | 
  6148 % @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.  | 
         | 
  6149 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.  | 
         | 
  6150 %  | 
         | 
  6151 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image  | 
         | 
  6152 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get  | 
         | 
  6153 % undone and the next image would fail.  | 
         | 
  6154 \openin 1 = epsf.tex  | 
         | 
  6155 \ifeof 1 \else  | 
         | 
  6156   \closein 1  | 
         | 
  6157   % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in  | 
         | 
  6158   % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).  | 
         | 
  6159   \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% | 
         | 
  6160   \input epsf.tex  | 
         | 
  6161 \fi  | 
         | 
  6162 %  | 
         | 
  6163 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.  | 
         | 
  6164 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf  | 
         | 
  6165 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to | 
         | 
  6166   work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get  | 
         | 
  6167   it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}  | 
         | 
  6168 %  | 
         | 
  6169 \def\image#1{% | 
         | 
  6170   \ifx\epsfbox\undefined  | 
         | 
  6171     \ifwarnednoepsf \else  | 
         | 
  6172       \errhelp = \noepsfhelp  | 
         | 
  6173       \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% | 
         | 
  6174       \global\warnednoepsftrue  | 
         | 
  6175     \fi  | 
         | 
  6176   \else  | 
         | 
  6177     \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish  | 
         | 
  6178   \fi  | 
         | 
  6179 }  | 
         | 
  6180 %  | 
         | 
  6181 % Arguments to @image:  | 
         | 
  6182 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.  | 
         | 
  6183 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.  | 
         | 
  6184 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.  | 
         | 
  6185 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension.  | 
         | 
  6186 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.  | 
         | 
  6187 \newif\ifimagevmode  | 
         | 
  6188 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup | 
         | 
  6189   \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example  | 
         | 
  6190   \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names  | 
         | 
  6191   % If the image is by itself, center it.  | 
         | 
  6192   \ifvmode  | 
         | 
  6193     \imagevmodetrue  | 
         | 
  6194     \nobreak\bigskip  | 
         | 
  6195     % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert  | 
         | 
  6196     % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space  | 
         | 
  6197     % above and below.  | 
         | 
  6198     \nobreak\vskip\parskip  | 
         | 
  6199     \nobreak  | 
         | 
  6200     \line\bgroup\hss  | 
         | 
  6201   \fi  | 
         | 
  6202   %  | 
         | 
  6203   % Output the image.  | 
         | 
  6204   \ifpdf  | 
         | 
  6205     \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% | 
         | 
  6206   \else  | 
         | 
  6207     % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.  | 
         | 
  6208     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi | 
         | 
  6209     \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi | 
         | 
  6210     \epsfbox{#1.eps}% | 
         | 
  6211   \fi  | 
         | 
  6212   %  | 
         | 
  6213   \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image  | 
         | 
  6214 \endgroup}  | 
         | 
  6215   | 
         | 
  6216   | 
         | 
  6217 \message{localization,} | 
         | 
  6218 % and i18n.  | 
         | 
  6219   | 
         | 
  6220 % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after  | 
         | 
  6221 % @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything  | 
         | 
  6222 % properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.  | 
         | 
  6223 % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.  | 
         | 
  6224 %  | 
         | 
  6225 \def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage} | 
         | 
  6226 \def\dodocumentlanguage#1{% | 
         | 
  6227   \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.  | 
         | 
  6228   % Read the file if it exists.  | 
         | 
  6229   \openin 1 txi-#1.tex  | 
         | 
  6230   \ifeof1  | 
         | 
  6231     \errhelp = \nolanghelp  | 
         | 
  6232     \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% | 
         | 
  6233     \let\temp = \relax  | 
         | 
  6234   \else  | 
         | 
  6235     \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }% | 
         | 
  6236   \fi  | 
         | 
  6237   \temp  | 
         | 
  6238   \endgroup  | 
         | 
  6239 }  | 
         | 
  6240 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or | 
         | 
  6241 is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory  | 
         | 
  6242 should work if nowhere else does.}  | 
         | 
  6243   | 
         | 
  6244   | 
         | 
  6245 % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most  | 
         | 
  6246 % likely, but for now just recognize it.  | 
         | 
  6247 \let\documentencoding = \comment  | 
         | 
  6248   | 
         | 
  6249   | 
         | 
  6250 % Page size parameters.  | 
         | 
  6251 %  | 
         | 
  6252 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt  | 
         | 
  6253   | 
         | 
  6254 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt  | 
         | 
  6255 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt  | 
         | 
  6256 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt  | 
         | 
  6257   | 
         | 
  6258 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.  | 
         | 
  6259 \vbadness = 10000  | 
         | 
  6260   | 
         | 
  6261 % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.  | 
         | 
  6262 \hbadness = 2000  | 
         | 
  6263   | 
         | 
  6264 % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.  | 
         | 
  6265 \widowpenalty=10000  | 
         | 
  6266 \clubpenalty=10000  | 
         | 
  6267   | 
         | 
  6268 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're  | 
         | 
  6269 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of  | 
         | 
  6270 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on  | 
         | 
  6271 % \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.  | 
         | 
  6272 %  | 
         | 
  6273 \def\setemergencystretch{% | 
         | 
  6274   \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined  | 
         | 
  6275     % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.  | 
         | 
  6276     \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% | 
         | 
  6277   \else  | 
         | 
  6278     \emergencystretch = .15\hsize  | 
         | 
  6279   \fi  | 
         | 
  6280 }  | 
         | 
  6281   | 
         | 
  6282 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;  | 
         | 
  6283 % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8)  | 
         | 
  6284 % physical page width.  | 
         | 
  6285 %  | 
         | 
  6286 % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define | 
         | 
  6287 % \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.  | 
         | 
  6288 %  | 
         | 
  6289 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% | 
         | 
  6290   \voffset = #3\relax  | 
         | 
  6291   \topskip = #6\relax  | 
         | 
  6292   \splittopskip = \topskip  | 
         | 
  6293   %  | 
         | 
  6294   \vsize = #1\relax  | 
         | 
  6295   \advance\vsize by \topskip  | 
         | 
  6296   \outervsize = \vsize  | 
         | 
  6297   \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin  | 
         | 
  6298   \pageheight = \vsize  | 
         | 
  6299   %  | 
         | 
  6300   \hsize = #2\relax  | 
         | 
  6301   \outerhsize = \hsize  | 
         | 
  6302   \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in  | 
         | 
  6303   \pagewidth = \hsize  | 
         | 
  6304   %  | 
         | 
  6305   \normaloffset = #4\relax  | 
         | 
  6306   \bindingoffset = #5\relax  | 
         | 
  6307   %  | 
         | 
  6308   \ifpdf  | 
         | 
  6309     \pdfpageheight #7\relax  | 
         | 
  6310     \pdfpagewidth #8\relax  | 
         | 
  6311   \fi  | 
         | 
  6312   %  | 
         | 
  6313   \setleading{\textleading} | 
         | 
  6314   %  | 
         | 
  6315   \parindent = \defaultparindent  | 
         | 
  6316   \setemergencystretch  | 
         | 
  6317 }  | 
         | 
  6318   | 
         | 
  6319 % @letterpaper (the default).  | 
         | 
  6320 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
         | 
  6321   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt  | 
         | 
  6322   \textleading = 13.2pt  | 
         | 
  6323   %  | 
         | 
  6324   % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.  | 
         | 
  6325   \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}% | 
         | 
  6326                     {\voffset}{.25in}% | 
         | 
  6327                     {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% | 
         | 
  6328                     {11in}{8.5in}% | 
         | 
  6329 }}  | 
         | 
  6330   | 
         | 
  6331 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.  | 
         | 
  6332 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
         | 
  6333   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt  | 
         | 
  6334   \textleading = 12pt  | 
         | 
  6335   %  | 
         | 
  6336   \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% | 
         | 
  6337                     {\voffset}{.25in}% | 
         | 
  6338                     {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% | 
         | 
  6339                     {9.25in}{7in}% | 
         | 
  6340   %  | 
         | 
  6341   \lispnarrowing = 0.3in  | 
         | 
  6342   \tolerance = 700  | 
         | 
  6343   \hfuzz = 1pt  | 
         | 
  6344   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt  | 
         | 
  6345   \defbodyindent = .5cm  | 
         | 
  6346 }}  | 
         | 
  6347   | 
         | 
  6348 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.  | 
         | 
  6349 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
         | 
  6350   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt  | 
         | 
  6351   \textleading = 13.2pt  | 
         | 
  6352   %  | 
         | 
  6353   % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050  | 
         | 
  6354   % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.  | 
         | 
  6355   % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust  | 
         | 
  6356   % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then  | 
         | 
  6357   % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in  | 
         | 
  6358   % your texinfo source file like this:  | 
         | 
  6359   % @tex  | 
         | 
  6360   % \global\normaloffset = -6mm  | 
         | 
  6361   % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm  | 
         | 
  6362   % @end tex  | 
         | 
  6363   \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm} | 
         | 
  6364                     {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | 
         | 
  6365                     {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | 
         | 
  6366                     {297mm}{210mm}% | 
         | 
  6367   %  | 
         | 
  6368   \tolerance = 700  | 
         | 
  6369   \hfuzz = 1pt  | 
         | 
  6370   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt  | 
         | 
  6371   \defbodyindent = 5mm  | 
         | 
  6372 }}  | 
         | 
  6373   | 
         | 
  6374 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.  | 
         | 
  6375 % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.  | 
         | 
  6376 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.  | 
         | 
  6377 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
         | 
  6378   \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt  | 
         | 
  6379   \textleading = 12.5pt  | 
         | 
  6380   %  | 
         | 
  6381   \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% | 
         | 
  6382                     {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | 
         | 
  6383                     {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% | 
         | 
  6384                     {210mm}{148mm}% | 
         | 
  6385   %  | 
         | 
  6386   \lispnarrowing = 0.2in  | 
         | 
  6387   \tolerance = 800  | 
         | 
  6388   \hfuzz = 1.2pt  | 
         | 
  6389   \contentsrightmargin = 0pt  | 
         | 
  6390   \defbodyindent = 2mm  | 
         | 
  6391   \tableindent = 12mm  | 
         | 
  6392 }}  | 
         | 
  6393   | 
         | 
  6394 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  | 
         | 
  6395 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
         | 
  6396   \afourpaper  | 
         | 
  6397   \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% | 
         | 
  6398                     {\voffset}{4.6mm}% | 
         | 
  6399                     {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | 
         | 
  6400                     {297mm}{210mm}% | 
         | 
  6401   %  | 
         | 
  6402   % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.  | 
         | 
  6403   \globaldefs = 0  | 
         | 
  6404 }}  | 
         | 
  6405   | 
         | 
  6406 % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.  | 
         | 
  6407 \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 | 
         | 
  6408   \afourpaper  | 
         | 
  6409   \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% | 
         | 
  6410                     {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% | 
         | 
  6411                     {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | 
         | 
  6412                     {297mm}{210mm}% | 
         | 
  6413   \globaldefs = 0  | 
         | 
  6414 }}  | 
         | 
  6415   | 
         | 
  6416 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]  | 
         | 
  6417 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,  | 
         | 
  6418 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.  | 
         | 
  6419 %  | 
         | 
  6420 \def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx} | 
         | 
  6421 \def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} | 
         | 
  6422 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% | 
         | 
  6423   \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi | 
         | 
  6424   \globaldefs = 1  | 
         | 
  6425   %  | 
         | 
  6426   \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt  | 
         | 
  6427   \setleading{\textleading}% | 
         | 
  6428   %  | 
         | 
  6429   \dimen0 = #1  | 
         | 
  6430   \advance\dimen0 by \voffset  | 
         | 
  6431   %  | 
         | 
  6432   \dimen2 = \hsize  | 
         | 
  6433   \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset  | 
         | 
  6434   %  | 
         | 
  6435   \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% | 
         | 
  6436                     {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% | 
         | 
  6437                     {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | 
         | 
  6438                     {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% | 
         | 
  6439 }}  | 
         | 
  6440   | 
         | 
  6441 % Set default to letter.  | 
         | 
  6442 %  | 
         | 
  6443 \letterpaper  | 
         | 
  6444   | 
         | 
  6445   | 
         | 
  6446 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} | 
         | 
  6447   | 
         | 
  6448 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.  | 
         | 
  6449 \catcode`\"=\other  | 
         | 
  6450 \catcode`\~=\other  | 
         | 
  6451 \catcode`\^=\other  | 
         | 
  6452 \catcode`\_=\other  | 
         | 
  6453 \catcode`\|=\other  | 
         | 
  6454 \catcode`\<=\other  | 
         | 
  6455 \catcode`\>=\other  | 
         | 
  6456 \catcode`\+=\other  | 
         | 
  6457 \catcode`\$=\other  | 
         | 
  6458 \def\normaldoublequote{"} | 
         | 
  6459 \def\normaltilde{~} | 
         | 
  6460 \def\normalcaret{^} | 
         | 
  6461 \def\normalunderscore{_} | 
         | 
  6462 \def\normalverticalbar{|} | 
         | 
  6463 \def\normalless{<} | 
         | 
  6464 \def\normalgreater{>} | 
         | 
  6465 \def\normalplus{+} | 
         | 
  6466 \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix | 
         | 
  6467   | 
         | 
  6468 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont  | 
         | 
  6469 % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,  | 
         | 
  6470 % where something hairier probably needs to be done.  | 
         | 
  6471 %  | 
         | 
  6472 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print  | 
         | 
  6473 % otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero  | 
         | 
  6474 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all  | 
         | 
  6475 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.  | 
         | 
  6476 %  | 
         | 
  6477 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} | 
         | 
  6478   | 
         | 
  6479 % Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches  | 
         | 
  6480 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from  | 
         | 
  6481 % italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway  | 
         | 
  6482 % this is not a problem.  | 
         | 
  6483 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} | 
         | 
  6484   | 
         | 
  6485 % Turn off all special characters except @  | 
         | 
  6486 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).  | 
         | 
  6487 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can  | 
         | 
  6488 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.  | 
         | 
  6489   | 
         | 
  6490 \catcode`\"=\active  | 
         | 
  6491 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} | 
         | 
  6492 \let"=\activedoublequote  | 
         | 
  6493 \catcode`\~=\active  | 
         | 
  6494 \def~{{\tt\char126}} | 
         | 
  6495 \chardef\hat=`\^  | 
         | 
  6496 \catcode`\^=\active  | 
         | 
  6497 \def^{{\tt \hat}} | 
         | 
  6498   | 
         | 
  6499 \catcode`\_=\active  | 
         | 
  6500 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} | 
         | 
  6501 % Subroutine for the previous macro.  | 
         | 
  6502 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } | 
         | 
  6503   | 
         | 
  6504 \catcode`\|=\active  | 
         | 
  6505 \def|{{\tt\char124}} | 
         | 
  6506 \chardef \less=`\<  | 
         | 
  6507 \catcode`\<=\active  | 
         | 
  6508 \def<{{\tt \less}} | 
         | 
  6509 \chardef \gtr=`\>  | 
         | 
  6510 \catcode`\>=\active  | 
         | 
  6511 \def>{{\tt \gtr}} | 
         | 
  6512 \catcode`\+=\active  | 
         | 
  6513 \def+{{\tt \char 43}} | 
         | 
  6514 \catcode`\$=\active  | 
         | 
  6515 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix | 
         | 
  6516   | 
         | 
  6517 % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.  | 
         | 
  6518 {\catcode`\==\active | 
         | 
  6519 \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}} | 
         | 
  6520   | 
         | 
  6521 \catcode`+=\active  | 
         | 
  6522 \catcode`\_=\active  | 
         | 
  6523   | 
         | 
  6524 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file  | 
         | 
  6525 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.  | 
         | 
  6526 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.  | 
         | 
  6527 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.  | 
         | 
  6528 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} | 
         | 
  6529   | 
         | 
  6530 \catcode`\@=0  | 
         | 
  6531   | 
         | 
  6532 % \rawbackslashxx outputs one backslash character in current font,  | 
         | 
  6533 % as in \char`\\.  | 
         | 
  6534 \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\  | 
         | 
  6535   | 
         | 
  6536 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \rawbackslashxx.  | 
         | 
  6537 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with  | 
         | 
  6538 % catcode other.  | 
         | 
  6539 {\catcode`\\=\active | 
         | 
  6540  @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx} | 
         | 
  6541  @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} | 
         | 
  6542 }  | 
         | 
  6543   | 
         | 
  6544 % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.  | 
         | 
  6545 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}} | 
         | 
  6546   | 
         | 
  6547 % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.  | 
         | 
  6548 \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}} | 
         | 
  6549   | 
         | 
  6550 \catcode`\\=\active  | 
         | 
  6551   | 
         | 
  6552 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters  | 
         | 
  6553 % even after parsing them.  | 
         | 
  6554 @def@turnoffactive{% | 
         | 
  6555   @let"=@normaldoublequote  | 
         | 
  6556   @let\=@realbackslash  | 
         | 
  6557   @let~=@normaltilde  | 
         | 
  6558   @let^=@normalcaret  | 
         | 
  6559   @let_=@normalunderscore  | 
         | 
  6560   @let|=@normalverticalbar  | 
         | 
  6561   @let<=@normalless  | 
         | 
  6562   @let>=@normalgreater  | 
         | 
  6563   @let+=@normalplus  | 
         | 
  6564   @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix  | 
         | 
  6565 }  | 
         | 
  6566   | 
         | 
  6567 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of | 
         | 
  6568 % the literal character `\'.  (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in  | 
         | 
  6569 % effect.)  | 
         | 
  6570 %  | 
         | 
  6571 @def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash} | 
         | 
  6572   | 
         | 
  6573 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.  | 
         | 
  6574 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.  | 
         | 
  6575 @otherifyactive  | 
         | 
  6576   | 
         | 
  6577 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.  | 
         | 
  6578 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing  | 
         | 
  6579 % a backslash.  | 
         | 
  6580 %  | 
         | 
  6581 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} | 
         | 
  6582 @global@let\ = @eatinput  | 
         | 
  6583   | 
         | 
  6584 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then  | 
         | 
  6585 % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix | 
         | 
  6586 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.  | 
         | 
  6587 % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input  | 
         | 
  6588 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.  | 
         | 
  6589 %  | 
         | 
  6590 @gdef@fixbackslash{% | 
         | 
  6591   @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi  | 
         | 
  6592   @catcode`+=@active  | 
         | 
  6593   @catcode`@_=@active  | 
         | 
  6594 }  | 
         | 
  6595   | 
         | 
  6596 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.  | 
         | 
  6597 @escapechar = `@@  | 
         | 
  6598   | 
         | 
  6599 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.  | 
         | 
  6600 @catcode`@& = @other  | 
         | 
  6601 @catcode`@# = @other  | 
         | 
  6602 @catcode`@% = @other  | 
         | 
  6603   | 
         | 
  6604 @c Set initial fonts.  | 
         | 
  6605 @textfonts  | 
         | 
  6606 @rm  | 
         | 
  6607   | 
         | 
  6608   | 
         | 
  6609 @c Local variables:  | 
         | 
  6610 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)  | 
         | 
  6611 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"  | 
         | 
  6612 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" | 
         | 
  6613 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"  | 
         | 
  6614 @c time-stamp-end: "}"  | 
         | 
  6615 @c End:  |